FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF USER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF USER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF MANUAL
If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.
PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF SUMMARY:
What are some precautions to take when transporting the projector?
Refer to “Cautions when transporting”
What are some precautions to take when installing the projector?
Refer to “Cautions when installing”
What are some security measures for the projector?
Refer to “Security”
What is DIGITAL LINK?
Refer to “DIGITAL LINK”
What is Art-Net?
Refer to “Art-Net”
What is Early Warning Software?
Refer to “Early Warning Software”
What are the cautions on use?
Refer to “Cautions on use”
What are the accessories included with the projector?
Refer to “Accessories”
What optional accessories are available for the projector?
Refer to “Optional accessories”
What information is provided about the projector?
Refer to “About your projector”
What are the functions of the remote control?
Refer to “Remote control”
What are the features of the projector body?
Refer to “Projector body”
How do you prepare the remote control for use?
Refer to “Preparing the remote control”
How do you insert and remove the batteries from the remote control?
Refer to “Inserting and removing the batteries”
How do you use the remote control when operating multiple projectors?
Refer to “When using the multiple projectors”
How do you connect the remote control to the projector with a cable?
Refer to “Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable”
How do you set up the projector?
Refer to “Setting up”
What are the different installation modes?
Refer to “Installation mode”
What are the parts required for installation?
Refer to “Parts for installation (optional)”
What is the relationship between projected image size and throw distance?
Refer to “Projected image and throw distance”
How do you adjust the adjustable feet?
Refer to “Adjusting adjustable feet”
How do you remove the projection lens?
Refer to “Removing the projection lens”
How do you attach the projection lens?
Refer to “Attaching the projection lens”
What are the steps to take before connecting the projector?
Refer to “Before connecting”
What is an example of connecting AV equipment to the projector?
Refer to “Connecting example: AV equipment”
What is an example of connecting computers to the projector?
Refer to “Connecting example: Computers”
What is an example of connecting using DIGITAL LINK?
Refer to “Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK”
What is an example of connecting when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function?
Refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function”
How do you switch the projector on and off?
Refer to “Switching on/off the projector”
How do you connect the power cord?
Refer to “Connecting the power cord”
What does the power indicator signify?
Refer to “Power indicator”
How do you switch on the projector?
Refer to “Switching on the projector”
What steps should be taken when the initial setting screen is displayed?
Refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed”
How do you make adjustments and selections?
Refer to “Making adjustments and selections”
How do you switch off the projector?
Refer to “Switching off the projector”
How do you project an image?
Refer to “Projecting”
How do you select the input signal?
Refer to “Selecting the input signal”
How do you adjust the focus, zoom, and shift?
Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift”
How do you adjust the lens position and focus when using the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030)?
Refer to “Adjusting the lens position and focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used”
How do you set the lens position?
Refer to “Setting the lens position”
What is the adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)?
Refer to “Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)”
How do you operate the projector with the remote control?
Refer to “Operating with the remote control”
How do you use the shutter function?
Refer to “Using the shutter function”
How do you use the on-screen display function?
Refer to “Using the on-screen display function”
How do you use the automatic setup function?
Refer to “Using the automatic setup function”
How do you use the function button?
Refer to “Using the function button”
How do you display the internal test pattern?
Refer to “Displaying internal test pattern”
How do you use the status function?
Refer to “Using the status function”
How do you set the ID number of the remote control?
Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”
How do you navigate the projector’s menu?
Refer to “Menu navigation”
How do you navigate through the menu?
Refer to “Navigating through the menu”
What are the options available in the main menu?
Refer to “Main menu”
What are the options available in the sub-menu?
Refer to “Sub-menu”
What options are available in the [PICTURE] menu?
Refer to “[PICTURE] menu”
What is [PICTURE MODE]?
Refer to “[PICTURE MODE]”
What is [CONTRAST]?
Refer to “[CONTRAST]”
What is [BRIGHTNESS]?
Refer to “[BRIGHTNESS]”
What is [COLOR]?
Refer to “[COLOR]”
What is [TINT]?
Refer to “[TINT]”
What is [COLOR TEMPERATURE]?
Refer to “[COLOR TEMPERATURE]”
What is [WHITE GAIN]?
Refer to “[WHITE GAIN]”
What is [GAMMA]?
Refer to “[GAMMA]”
What is [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]?
Refer to “[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]”
What is [SHARPNESS]?
Refer to “[SHARPNESS]”
What is [NOISE REDUCTION]?
Refer to “[NOISE REDUCTION]”
What is [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]?
Refer to “[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]”
What is [SYSTEM SELECTOR]?
Refer to “[SYSTEM SELECTOR]”
What is sRGB-compliant video?
Refer to “sRGB-compliant video”
What options are available in the [POSITION] menu?
Refer to “[POSITION] menu”
What is [SHIFT]?
Refer to “[SHIFT]”
What is [ASPECT]?
Refer to “[ASPECT]”
What is [ZOOM]?
Refer to “[ZOOM]”
What is [CLOCK PHASE]?
Refer to “[CLOCK PHASE]”
What is [GEOMETRY]?
Refer to “[GEOMETRY]”
What options are available in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu?
Refer to “[ADVANCED MENU] menu”
What is [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]?
Refer to “[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]”
What is [BLANKING]?
Refer to “[BLANKING]”
What is [INPUT RESOLUTION]?
Refer to “[INPUT RESOLUTION]”
What is [CLAMP POSITION]?
Refer to “[CLAMP POSITION]”
What is [EDGE BLENDING]?
Refer to “[EDGE BLENDING]”
What is [FRAME RESPONSE]?
Refer to “[FRAME RESPONSE]”
What is [RASTER POSITION]?
Refer to “[RASTER POSITION]”
What options are available in the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu?
Refer to “[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu”
How do you change the display language?
Refer to “Changing the display language”
What options are available in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu?
Refer to “[DISPLAY OPTION] menu”
What is [COLOR MATCHING]?
Refer to “[COLOR MATCHING]”
What is [COLOR CORRECTION]?
Refer to “[COLOR CORRECTION]”
What is [SCREEN SETTING]?
Refer to “[SCREEN SETTING]”
What is [AUTO SIGNAL]?
Refer to “[AUTO SIGNAL]”
What is [AUTO SETUP]?
Refer to “[AUTO SETUP]”
What is [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]?
Refer to “[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]”
What is [RGB IN]?
Refer to “[RGB IN]”
What is [DVI-D IN]?
Refer to “[DVI-D IN]”
What is [HDMI IN]?
Refer to “[HDMI IN]”
What is [DIGITAL LINK IN]?
Refer to “[DIGITAL LINK IN]”
What is [SDI IN]?
Refer to “[SDI IN]”
What is [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]?
Refer to “[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]”
What is [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (only when NTSC or 480/60i YCBCR signal is input)?
Refer to “[CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] (only when NTSC or 480/60i YCBCR signal is input)”
What is [IMAGE ROTATION]?
Refer to “[IMAGE ROTATION]”
What is [BACK COLOR]?
Refer to “[BACK COLOR]”
What is [STARTUP LOGO]?
Refer to “[STARTUP LOGO]”
What is [UNIFORMITY]?
Refer to “[UNIFORMITY]”
What is [SHUTTER SETTING]?
Refer to “[SHUTTER SETTING]”
What is [FREEZE]?
Refer to “[FREEZE]”
What is [WAVEFORM MONITOR]?
Refer to “[WAVEFORM MONITOR]”
What is [CUT OFF]?
Refer to “[CUT OFF]”
What options are available in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu?
Refer to “[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu”
What is [PROJECTOR ID]?
Refer to “[PROJECTOR ID]”
What is [PROJECTION METHOD]?
Refer to “[PROJECTION METHOD]”
What is [OPERATION SETTING]?
Refer to “[OPERATION SETTING]”
What is [LIGHT OUTPUT]?
Refer to “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”
What is [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]?
Refer to “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]”
What is [STANDBY MODE]?
Refer to “[STANDBY MODE]”
What is [QUICK STARTUP]?
Refer to “[QUICK STARTUP]”
What is [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]?
Refer to “[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]”
What is [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]?
Refer to “[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]”
What is [INITIAL STARTUP]?
Refer to “[INITIAL STARTUP]”
What is [STARTUP INPUT SELECT]?
Refer to “[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]”
What is [DATE AND TIME]?
Refer to “[DATE AND TIME]”
What is [SCHEDULE]?
Refer to “[SCHEDULE]”
What is [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]?
Refer to “[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]”
What is [RS-232C]?
Refer to “[RS-232C]”
What is [REMOTE2 MODE]?
Refer to “[REMOTE2 MODE]”
What is [FUNCTION BUTTON]?
Refer to “[FUNCTION BUTTON]”
What is [LENS CALIBRATION]?
Refer to “[LENS CALIBRATION]”
What is [STATUS]?
Refer to “[STATUS]”
What is [SAVE ALL USER DATA]?
Refer to “[SAVE ALL USER DATA]”
What is [LOAD ALL USER DATA]?
Refer to “[LOAD ALL USER DATA]”
What is [INITIALIZE]?
Refer to “[INITIALIZE]”
What is [SERVICE PASSWORD]?
Refer to “[SERVICE PASSWORD]”
What options are available in the [P IN P] menu?
Refer to “[P IN P] menu”
How do you use the P IN P function?
Refer to “Using the P IN P function”
What options are available in the [TEST PATTERN] menu?
Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu”
What is [TEST PATTERN]?
Refer to “[TEST PATTERN]”
What options are available in the [SIGNAL LIST] menu?
Refer to “[SIGNAL LIST] menu”
How do you register new signals?
Refer to “Registering new signals”
How do you rename the registered signal?
Refer to “Renaming the registered signal”
How do you delete the registered signal?
Refer to “Deleting the registered signal”
How do you protect the registered signal?
Refer to “Protecting the registered signal”
How do you expand the signal lock-in range?
Refer to “Expanding signal lock-in range”
What is sub memory?
Refer to “Sub memory”
What options are available in the [SECURITY] menu?
Refer to “[SECURITY] menu”
What is [SECURITY PASSWORD]?
Refer to “[SECURITY PASSWORD]”
What is [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]?
Refer to “[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]”
What is [DISPLAY SETTING]?
Refer to “[DISPLAY SETTING]”
What is [TEXT CHANGE]?
Refer to “[TEXT CHANGE]”
What is [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]?
Refer to “[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]”
What is [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]?
Refer to “[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]”
What options are available in the [NETWORK] menu?
Refer to “[NETWORK] menu”
What is [DIGITAL LINK MODE]?
Refer to “[DIGITAL LINK MODE]”
What is [DIGITAL LINK STATUS]?
Refer to “[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]”
What is [NETWORK SETUP]?
Refer to “[NETWORK SETUP]”
What is [NETWORK CONTROL]?
Refer to “[NETWORK CONTROL]”
What is [NETWORK STATUS]?
Refer to “[NETWORK STATUS]”
What is [DIGITAL LINK MENU]?
Refer to “[DIGITAL LINK MENU]”
What is [Art-Net SETUP]?
Refer to “[Art-Net SETUP]”
What is [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]?
Refer to “[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]”
What is [Art-Net STATUS]?
Refer to “[Art-Net STATUS]”
How do you connect the projector to the network?
Refer to “Network connection”
How do you connect to the network?
Refer to “Connecting to the network”
How do you use the Web control function?
Refer to “Web control function”
What type of computer can be used for setting up the projector?
Refer to “Computer that can be used for setting”
How do you access the projector settings from the web browser?
Refer to “Accessing from the web browser”
What do the light source/temperature indicators signify?
Refer to “Light source/temperature indicators”
What does it mean when an indicator lights up?
Refer to “When an indicator lights up”
How do you maintain the projector?
Refer to “Maintenance”
What precautions should be taken before maintaining the projector?
Refer to “Before maintaining the projector”
What are the troubleshooting steps for the projector?
Refer to “Troubleshooting”
What do the [SELF TEST] indications mean?
Refer to “[SELF TEST] indications”
What technical information is provided?
Refer to “Technical information”
What is the PJLink protocol?
Refer to “PJLink protocol”
How do you use the Art-Net function?
Refer to “Using Art-Net function”
How do you control the projector using commands via LAN?
Refer to “Control commands via LAN”
What are the functions of the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals?
Refer to “<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals”
What is the function of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal?
Refer to “<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal”
What is the two-window display combination list?
Refer to “Two-window display combination list”
What is the control device password?
Refer to “Control device password”
What is the Upgrade Kit?
Refer to “Upgrade Kit”
What is the list of compatible signals?
Refer to “List of compatible signals”
What are the specifications of the projector?
Refer to “Specifications”
What are the dimensions of the projector?
Refer to “Dimensions”
What precautions should be taken when attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket?
Refer to “Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket”
What does the symbol of a lightning flash with arrowhead within an equilateral triangle on the projector indicate?
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
What does the exclamation point within an equilateral triangle indicate?
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
What class is the laser in this projector (USA and Canada)?
Class 3R
What class is the laser in this projector (India)?
Class 1
What class is the laser in this projector (other countries or regions)?
Class 1
What is the power supply requirement for North/Middle/South America?
100 V – 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only
What is the voltage limit for the AC power cord supplied with the projector in North/Middle/South America?
125 V
What type of power plug is the projector equipped with in North/Middle/South America?
Three-pin grounding-type power plug
What should you do if you are unable to insert the three-pin grounding-type power plug into the outlet?
Contact an electrician.
Is the projector intended for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75?
No
For permanently connected equipment, what should be incorporated in the building installation wiring?
A readily accessible disconnect device
For pluggable equipment, where should the socket-outlet be installed?
Near the equipment and easily accessible
What does the CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery in this product contain?
Perchlorate Material
What is the verification model number?
PT-RZ970B / PT-RZ970W / PT-RZ970LB / PT-RZ970LW / PT-RW930B / PT-RW930W / PT-RW930LB / PT-RW930LW / PT-RX110B / PT-RX110W / PT-RX110LB / PT-RX110LW
What is the trade name?
Panasonic
Who is the responsible party?
Panasonic Corporation of North America
What is the address of the responsible party?
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
Where can general contact information be found?
http://www.panasonic.com/support
Where can projector contact information be found?
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
What is the rating of the fuse fitted in the molded three-pin mains plug?
13 amps
What marks should be checked on the replacement fuse?
ASTA or BSI to BS1362
What should you do if you lose the fuse cover?
Do not use the plug until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.
What is the color code for the wires in the mains lead?
- Green – and – Yellow: Earth
- Blue: Neutral
- Brown: Live
To which terminal should the GREEN – AND – YELLOW wire be connected?
The terminal marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN – AND – YELLOW
To which terminal should the BLUE wire be connected?
The terminal marked with the letter N or colored BLACK
To which terminal should the BROWN wire be connected?
The terminal marked with the letter L or colored RED
How do you replace the fuse?
Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
What is the importer’s name and address within the European Union?
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Where should the wall outlet or circuit breaker be installed?
Near the equipment and easily accessible
When should you cut off the power supply immediately?
If the following problems occur:
- If foreign objects or water get inside the projector
- If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken
- If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector
Who should you contact for repairs?
An Authorized Service Center
Should you attempt to repair the projector yourself?
No
What should you avoid doing during a thunderstorm?
Touching the projector or the cable
What could happen if the power cord is used while damaged?
Electric shocks, short-circuits, or fire
What should you avoid doing to the power cord?
Damaging, modifying, placing near hot objects, bending excessively, twisting, pulling, placing heavy objects on top of, or wrapping into a bundle
Who should you ask to carry out any repairs to the power cord?
An Authorized Service Center
Can you use a power cord other than the provided one?
No
What could result from not using the provided power cord to ground the device?
Electric shocks
How should the power plug and power connector be inserted?
Completely into the wall outlet and the projector terminal
What could result from using damaged plugs or loose wall outlets?
Electric shocks or overheating
Should you handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands?
No
What could happen if the power supply is overloaded?
Overheating and fire
How often should you clean the power plug?
Regularly
What could happen if dust builds up on the power plug?
Humidity can damage the insulation
What should you do if not using the projector for an extended period of time?
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet
How should you clean the power plug?
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
Where should you avoid placing the projector?
On soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats
What types of environments should the projector not be set up in?
Humid, dusty places, or places where the projector may come into contact with oily smoke or steam
What precautions should be taken when installing the projector?
Do not install the projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
What is the minimum distance to keep objects away from the air intake/exhaust ports?
500 mm (19-11/16")
Should you place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places?
No
Should you place the projector on cloth or papers?
No
What precautions should be taken regarding the light emitted from the lens?
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Is it safe to enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device?
No
What precautions should be taken regarding young children and the projector lens?
Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens.
When should you turn off the power and switch off the main power?
When you are away from the projector
What could happen if you project an image with the lens cover attached?
Fire
Should you attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector?
No
Who should you contact for inspection, adjustment, and repair work?
An Authorized Service Center
What types of objects should not be allowed to enter inside the projector?
Metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids
What precautions should be taken regarding liquids and the projector?
- Do not place containers of liquid near the projector.
- If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
Who should pay particular attention to the projector and its safety?
Children
What type of ceiling mount bracket should be used?
The one specified by Panasonic
What could happen if a ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one is used?
Falling accidents
What should be attached to the ceiling mount bracket?
The supplied safety cable
Who should carry out installation work such as installing the ceiling mount bracket?
A qualified technician
What could happen if installation is not carried out and secured correctly?
Injury or accidents, such as electric shocks
What should be used as an extra safety measure to prevent the projector from falling down?
The wire provided with the ceiling mount bracket
What precautions should be taken regarding batteries?
Refer to the following to avoid burns, battery leakage, overheating, explosion, or fire:
- Do not use unspecified batteries.
- Do not charge dry cell batteries.
- Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
- Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.
- Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins.
- Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
- Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
- Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
- Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
- Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
What should you do if the battery fluid leaks?
Do not touch it with bare hands and take the following measures:
- If battery fluid gets on your skin or clothing, rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
- If battery fluid comes into contact with your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Should children be allowed to reach the batteries?
No
What could happen if a child accidentally swallows a battery?
Physical harm
What should you do if a battery is swallowed?
Seek medical advice immediately
When should depleted batteries be removed from the remote control?
Promptly
What could happen if depleted batteries are left in the unit?
Fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion
When disconnecting the power cord, what should I be sure to hold?
Be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
Why should I hold the power plug and power connector when disconnecting the power cord?
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks will result.
When should I disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet?
When not using the projector for an extended period of time.
Why should I disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet when not using the projector?
Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
What should I do before replacing the projection lens?
Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
What could happen if the power plug is not removed before replacing the projection lens?
Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.
What should I do before carrying out any cleaning?
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
Why should I disconnect the power plug before cleaning?
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
What should I not place on top of the projector?
Heavy objects.
Why should I not place heavy objects on top of the projector?
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or injury.
What will happen to the projector if I place heavy objects on top of it?
The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Why should I not put my weight on the projector?
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
What should I be especially careful about regarding young children and the projector?
Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Why should the projector not be placed in extremely hot locations?
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.
Where should I take particular care when placing the projector?
In locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.
Where should I not put my hands?
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Why should I not put my hands in the openings beside the optical lens while shifting the lens?
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Where should I not install the projector?
Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.
Why should I not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur?
Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.
Why should I not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used?
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
Why should I not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used?
Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.
When should I disconnect all cables?
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
What could happen if the projector is moved with cables still attached?
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to occur.
What should I keep away from metal parts inside the ceiling when mounting the projector on the ceiling?
Keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with metal parts inside the ceiling.
What could happen if mounting screws and power cord come into contact with metal parts inside the ceiling?
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
When should I remove the batteries from the remote control?
When not using the projector for an extended period of time.
Why should I remove the batteries from the remote control when not using the projector for an extended period of time?
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or contamination of surrounding area.
When should I ask my dealer about cleaning inside the projector?
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated duration.
What could happen if I continue to use the projector while dust is accumulated inside?
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.
How do I remove the battery from the remote control?
To remove the battery:
- Press the guide and lift the cover.
- Remove the batteries.
What is the trademark of Panasonic Corporation?
SOLID SHINE
What are the registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries?
Windows, Internet Explorer, and Microsoft Edge
What are the trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries?
Mac, Mac OS, and Safari
What is PJLinkTM?
A registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and regions.
What are the trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries?
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
What are the registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.?
RoomView and Crestron RoomView
What are the trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.?
Crestron ConnectedTM and Fusion RV
What is the trademark of HDBaseT Alliance?
HDBaseTTM
What are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. in the United States and/or other countries?
Adobe, Adobe Flash Player, and Adobe Reader
Who manufactures and sells the Ricoh bitmap fonts used in the on-screen menu?
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
How may the illustrations of the projector, screen, and other parts vary from the actual product?
Illustrations of the projector, screen, and other parts may vary from the actual product.
What do illustrations of the projector with the power cord attached represent?
Only examples.
What does the shape of the supplied power cords depend on?
The country where you purchased the product.
What are the features of the projector?
- High luminance and high contrast
- Easy and highly flexible setup
- Long life and high reliability
Describe the high luminance and high contrast feature of the projector?
With a unique optical system which uses a new-generation laser light source, and the laser light source drive system, high luminance of 10 000 lm*1 and high contrast of 10 000:1 are achieved even with its compact size.
*1 A value for PT-RX110. A value for PT-RZ970 and PT-RW930 is 9 400 lm.
Describe the easy and highly flexible setup feature of the projector?
Easy and flexible setup is achieved by compatibility with DIGITAL LINK and Art-Net, standard support of 3G-SDI (only for PT-RZ970), standard support of geometric adjustment function, 360° installation support including horizontal, vertical, and portrait utilizing the characteristics of solid-state light source, and a lineup of various optional lenses.
Describe the long life and high reliability feature of the projector?
The maintenance cost for long-term operation is reduced by the unique light source cooling control technology and improvement of the dust resistance. Also, it will contribute to the stable operation by implementation of the backup function that will continue the projection by switching to the backup input signal immediately even when the input signal is discontinued, in addition to adopting solid-state light source which has long life.
What are the Quick Steps to use the projector?
For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
- Set up the projector.
- Connect with external devices.
- Connect the power cord.
- Switch on the projector.
- Make initial settings.
- Take this step when you switch on the power for the first time after purchasing the projector.
- Select the input signal.
- Adjust the image.
What should I do if I purchased the projector with the standard zoom lens?
If you purchased the projector with the standard zoom lens, remove the lens protection material before use, and store it for the future use.
When should I move the lens position to the home position and attach the lens protection material?
When transporting.
What should I do if I purchased the projector with the lens sold separately?
If you purchased the projector with the lens sold separately, remove the lens hole cover before use, and store it for the future use.
When should I move the lens position to the home position, remove the projection lens, and attach the lens hole cover?
When transporting.
Where can I find the steps to move the lens position to the home position?
Refer to “Setting the lens position”.
How should I hold the projector when transporting it?
Hold the bottom of the projector and do not hold the projection lens or the opening around the projection lens when transporting.
What could happen if I do not properly hold the projector when transporting it?
Failure to do so may cause damage.
How should I handle the projector?
Handle the projector in a way not to apply excessive vibration or shock.
What could happen if I do not handle the projector in a way not to apply excessive vibration or shock?
Failure to do so may cause a failure due to the damaged internal components.
Should I transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended?
No. Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended.
Why should I not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended?
Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
What should I do after attaching the projection lens?
Be sure to attach the Lens Mount Cover.
Why should I attach the Lens Mount Cover after attaching the projection lens?
Not doing so may cause failure due to accumulating dust internally.
Where should I not set up the projector?
Outdoors.
Why should I not set up the projector outdoors?
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
Where should I not set up the projector?
- Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal components or malfunction.
- Location close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunction.
- Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare cases due to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector.
- Places with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions. Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.
- Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
- Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface causes damage to the DLP chips.
Who should I ask when installing the projector on a ceiling?
Be sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on a ceiling.
What is required when installing the projector on a ceiling?
The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket is required.
What are the model numbers of the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket?
- ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
- ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
- ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)
- ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)
Who should I ask to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK connection?
Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK connection.
What could happen if the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK connection is not properly installed?
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
What may cause the projector to not work properly?
The projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast station or the radio.
What should I do if there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location?
Install the projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends.
Why is the focus unstable in the period just after switching on the power?
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in the period just after switching on the power.
How long should images be projected continuously before the focus is adjusted?
It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
What is the maximum altitude that the projector should be installed at?
Do not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780’) or higher above sea level.
What is the maximum ambient temperature that the projector should be used in?
Do not use the projector in a location that the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C (113 °F).
What could happen if the projector is used at an altitude that is too high or in an ambient temperature that is too high?
Using the projector in a location that the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce the life of the components or result in malfunctions.
Is projection in all 360° direction possible?
Yes. Projection in all 360° direction is possible.
When is the geometric adjustment function disabled?
The geometric adjustment function is disabled when projecting the input signal rotated by 90°. (Only for PT‑RW930, PT‑RX110)
Can the geometric adjustment function be used when projecting the input signal rotated by 90°?
No. The geometric adjustment function cannot be used when projecting the input signal rotated by 90°.
What should I do to prevent distortion in the projected image?
When installing the projector, follow the following instructions to prevent distortion in the projected image.
- Use a flat screen.
- Install the projector so that the front side of the projector is parallel to the screen.
- Install the projector so that the image can be projected within the range of shift adjustment by moving the lens position.
Where can the 90° rotation of the image be set?
The 90° rotation of the image can be set in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [IMAGE ROTATION].
What can be done to prevent the top surface from getting scratched during use if the projector is used by installing its top placed on the floor?
To prevent the top surface from getting scratched during use, it is recommended to attach about a 20 mm (25/32") square buffer material (such as rubber cushion) on the four corners of the top surface.
What should the adjustable feet be used for?
Use the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle.
What may happen if the adjustable feet are used for other purposes?
Using them for other purposes may damage the projector.
What should I do when installing the projector with a method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet, top placed on the floor, or the ceiling installation?
Use the five screw holes for ceiling mount to fix the projector to the mount. (Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 12 mm (15/32"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
What should I do when installing the projector with a method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet, top placed on the floor, or the ceiling installation to make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector bottom and the setting surface?
Make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers (metallic) between them.
Should I stack projectors on top of each other?
No. Do not stack projectors on top of each other.
Should I block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector?
No. Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
What should I prevent from happening to the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector?
Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
How much space should I provide around the projector?
100 mm (3-15/16") or longer on the sides and 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer on the top, bottom, front, and back.
What could happen if the projector is installed in a confined space and there is not enough ventilation?
Exhaust heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
What are some safety measures I should take when using this product?
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
- Personal information being leaked via this product
- Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
- Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
What are some security measures I should take when using the product?
- Make your password difficult to guess as much as possible.
- Change your password periodically.
- The connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.
- Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in.
Where can a password be set?
A password can be set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
What should I do if Panasonic Corporation or its affiliate companies ask for my password directly?
Do not divulge your password.
Where can a password for the web control be set?
A password for the web control can be set in the [Change password] page of the web control screen.
What is DIGITAL LINK?
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic to the HDBaseTTM communication standard formulated by HDBaseT Alliance.
What does this projector support?
This projector supports the optional Panasonic DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) and peripheral devices by other manufacturers (twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics) that use the same HDBaseTTM standard.
Where can I find information on the devices of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector?
For the devices of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the Panasonic website (https:// panasonic.net/cns/projector/).
What should I be aware of regarding verification for devices of other manufacturers?
Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been verified.
Who should I contact for operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers?
For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Does the projector support audio transmission?
This projector does not support audio transmission because it is not equipped with audio function.
What is “Art-Net”?
“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol. By using the DMX controller and the application software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.
What is the “Early Warning Software”?
The projector supports “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display (projector or flat panel display) and the peripheral devices inside an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects signs of possible abnormality. Also, maintenance can be performed in advance, because this software gives notification of approximate time to replace consumables of the display, to clean each part of the display, and to replace the components of the display.
How many displays can be registered for monitoring with the Early Warning Software?
Depending on the type of license, the number of displays that can be registered for monitoring varies. Limited to the first 90 days after installation in a computer, it is possible to register up to 2048 units of displays free of charge.
Where can the Early Warning Software be downloaded?
Download the software from the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/).
Is there any requirement for downloading the Early Warning Software?
It is necessary to register and login to PASS*1 to download.
What is PASS?
PASS stands for Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website.
Where can I find details about product disposal?
Visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/) for details.
How should the product be disposed of?
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the product without disassembling.
How can I get a good picture quality?
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen.
Why should I avoid touching the surface of the projection lens with my bare hands?
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and projected onto the screen.
What should I do when I do not use the projector?
Attach the lens cover supplied with the projector or with the optional projection lens to the projector when you do not use the projector.
What are DLP chips?
The DLP chips are precision-made.
Are missing or always lit pixels a sign of malfunction?
Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always lit. Such a phenomenon does not indicate malfunction.
What could damage the DLP chips?
Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips.
Why should I not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating?
Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.
What are the characteristics of the light source of the projector?
The light source of the projector uses lasers, and has the following characteristics:
- Depending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease. The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.
- The luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage. The time until when the luminance of the light source decreases by half differs depending on the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [OPERATING MODE].
When using the projector at an altitude lower than 2,700 m (8,858’) above sea level, and the operating environment temperature becomes 30 °C (86 °F) or higher, what may happen to the luminance of the light source?
The luminance of the light source may decrease.
When using the projector at an altitude between 2,700 m (8,858’) and 4,200 m (13,780’), and the operating environment temperature becomes 25 °C (77 °F) or higher, what may happen to the luminance of the light source?
The luminance of the light source may decrease.
What is the estimated time until when the luminance of the light source decreases by half?
The estimated time until when the luminance of the light source decreases by half is as follows: (The time is estimated when the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to.)
- When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL], [QUIET1], or [QUIET2]: Approximately 20,000 hours.
- When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [ECO]: Approximately 24,000 hours.
- When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE1]: Approximately 43,000 hours.
- When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE2]: Approximately 61,000 hours.
- When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE3]: Approximately 87,000 hours.
How can I maintain the luminance of the light source?
The luminance can be maintained as much as possible for the same runtime by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [CONSTANT MODE] to [AUTO]. This time is rough estimate when the projector is used without changing the [OPERATING MODE] setting, and will vary depending on individual difference and usage condition. If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the projector or replace the light source unit.
What should I do when connecting a computer or an external device?
When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords and shielded cables as well.
What accessories are provided with the projector?
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the number of accessories.
- Wireless/wired remote control unit <1> (N2QAYA000060).
- Power cord (TXFSX03VBDZ) (TXFSX02VBDZ) (TXFSX03VARZ) (TXFSX02UTRZ).
- Lens Mount Cover <1> (Black model: 1GE1RZ970BU) (White model: 1GE1RZ970WU) (The same color as the outer case will be supplied).
- Lens cover <1> (TKKL5244-1) (Only models with lens).
- CD-ROM <1> (1JK1RZ970BU).
- AAA/R03 or AAA/LR03 battery <2> (For remote control unit).
What should I do after unpacking the projector?
After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
Can I use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector?
Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
Who should I consult for missing accessories?
For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
What should I do with small parts?
Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Does the type and number of the supplied power cords vary?
The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
Are the model numbers of accessories subject to change?
The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
What are the contents of the supplied CD-ROM?
The contents of the supplied CD-ROM are as follows:
- Instruction/list (PDF)
- Operating Instructions
- Multi Monitoring & Control Software Operating Instructions
- Logo Transfer Software Operating Instructions
- List of Compatible Device Models This is a list of projectors that are compatible with the software contained in the CD-ROM and their restrictions.
What is Multi Monitoring & Control Software (Windows)?
This software allows you to monitor and control multiple displays (projector or flat panel display) connected to the LAN.
What is Logo Transfer Software (Windows)?
This software allows you to transfer original images, such as company logos to be displayed when projection starts, to the projector.
Where can I download the “List of Compatible Device Models” for the flat panel display compatible with the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”?
The “List of Compatible Device Models” for the flat panel display compatible with the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” can be downloaded from the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/prodisplays/).
What are the optional accessories and their model numbers?
Optional accessories (product name) Model No.:
- Projection lens
- Zoom Lens
- ET-DLE085
- ET-DLE150
- ET-DLE250
- ET-DLE350
- ET-DLE450
- Fixed-focus Lens
- ET-DLE030
- ET-DLE055
- Zoom Lens
- Ceiling Mount Bracket
- ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
- ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
- ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)
- ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)
- Early Warning Software (Basic license/3-year license)
- ET-SWA100 Series*1
- Upgrade Kit
- ET-UK20 (supported only for PT-RZ970)
- Auto Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit
- ET-CUK10 (supported only for PT-RZ970)*2
- Auto Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit (PC)
- ET-CUK10P (supported only for PT-RZ970)*2
- Digital Interface Box
- ET-YFB100G
- DIGITAL LINK Switcher
- ET-YFB200G
What do the suffixes in the Model No. of the Early Warning Software indicate?
The suffix of the Model No. differs according to the license type.
Where is the Auto Screen Adjustment Upgrade Kit available?
Available worldwide except in the United States.
Are the model numbers of optional accessories subject to change?
The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
What does the power standby <v> button do?
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
What does the power on <b> button do?
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned off (standby mode).
What does the remote control indicator do?
Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed.
What do the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) do?
Adjusts the projection lens.
What does the <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons do?
Used to navigate through the menu screen. asqw buttons are also used to enter the password in [SECURITY] or enter characters.
What does the <ON SCREEN> button do?
Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off (hide).
What do the input selection buttons (<RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI‑D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) do?
Switches the input signal to project. (SDI input is supported only for PT-RZ970).
What does the <FUNCTION> button do?
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.
What are the number (<0> – <9>) buttons used for?
Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple projector environment.
What does the <AUTO SETUP> button do?
Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting the image. [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment.
What does the <SHUTTER> button do?
Used to temporarily turn off the image.
What does the <TEST PATTERN> button do?
Displays the test pattern.
What does the <STATUS> button do?
Displays the projector information.
What does the <DEFAULT> button do?
Resets the content of the sub-menu to the factory default.
What does the <ID SET> button do?
Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector environment.
What is the remote control wired terminal?
This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.
What precautions should I take when handling the remote control?
- Do not drop the remote control.
- Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
- Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
- Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control:
- Do not use old battery with new one.
- Do not use batteries other than the type specified.
- Be sure the batteries are inserted properly. For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this first!”.
What is the effective operating distance of the remote control?
When operating the remote control by directly pointing at the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control within a distance approximately 30 m (98’5") from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30° vertically and horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.
What could affect the operation of the remote control?
- If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
- The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.
- If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use it in a place distant from the light source.
What does it mean if the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> blinks?
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
What does the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> indicate?
Indicates the status of the power.
What does the light source indicator <LIGHT1> indicate?
Indicates the status of light source 1.
What does the light source indicator <LIGHT2> indicate?
Indicates the status of light source 2.
What does the temperature indicator <TEMP> indicate?
Indicates the internal temperature status.
What do the adjustable feet do?
Adjusts the projection angle.
What is the burglar hook port for?
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
What is the security slot compatible with?
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security cables.
What does the <MAIN POWER> switch do?
Turns on/off the main power.
What should I connect to the <AC IN> terminal?
Connect the supplied power cord.
Why should I not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector?
Blocking the ventilation ports will cause the projector to overheat.
What does the power on <b> button on the control panel do?
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned off (standby mode).
What does the power standby <v> button on the control panel do?
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
What does the <RGB1> button do?
Switches the input to RGB1.
What does the <RGB2> button do?
Switches the input to RGB2.
What does the <DVI-D> button do?
Switches the input to DVI-D.
What does the <HDMI> button do?
Switches the input to HDMI.
What does the <DIGITAL LINK> button do?
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
What does the <SDI> button do?
Switches the input to SDI. (Only for PT-RZ970).
What does the <MENU> button on the control panel do?
Displays or hides the main menu. Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed. If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen display is turned on.
What does the <LENS> button do?
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and shift (position) of the lens.
What does the <ENTER> button on the control panel do?
Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
What does the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel do?
Used to temporarily turn off the image.
What are the asqw selection buttons on the control panel used for?
Used to select an item in the menu screen, change the setting, and adjust the level. Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter characters.
What does the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel do?
Automatically adjusts the image display position while the image is projected. [PROGRESS] is displayed during the automatic adjustment.
What are the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals used for?
These are terminals to connect the remote control for serial control in a multiple projector environment.
What is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the external control circuit.
What is the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal used for?
This is the RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control the projector by connecting a computer. This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out with a system using multiple projectors.
What is the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to output RS-232C compliant signal input to the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal. This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out with a system using multiple projectors.
What is the <SDI IN> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to input the SDI signal. (Only for PT-RZ970).
What are the <RGB 1 IN> terminals (<R/PR/VIDEO>, <G/Y>, <B/PB/C>, <SYNC/HD>, <VD>) used for?
These are terminals to input RGB signal, YCBCR/YPBPR signal, Y/C signal, or video signal.
What is the <RGB 2 IN> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to input the RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR signal.
What is the <DVI-D IN> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to input the DVI-D signal.
What is the <HDMI IN> terminal used for?
This is a terminal to input the HDMI signal.
What is the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal used for?
This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network. This is also used when connecting a video signal transmission device via the LAN terminal.
When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, where must the network connection be made?
When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
How do I insert and remove the batteries of the remote control?
- Open the cover.
- Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first).
- When removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
How do I use multiple projectors with the remote control?
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector. When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed”. The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use it as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary. For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”.
Where is the ID number of the projector body set?
Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
How can I simultaneously control multiple projectors next to each other with one remote control?
To simultaneously control multiple projectors next to each other with one remote control, connect the remote control with a commercially available M3 stereo mini jack cable using the <REMOTE 1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals. The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are susceptible to outside light.
What kind of cable should I use to connect the remote control to the projector?
Use a cable that is 15 m (49’3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds 15 m (49’3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
How should I set the projector up depending on the installation mode?
Set [FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode.
What are the menu item settings for setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [FRONT] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
What are the menu item settings for setting on a desk/floor and projecting from the rear (using the translucent screen)?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [REAR] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
What are the menu item settings for mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [FRONT] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: [AUTO] or [CEILING]
What are the menu item settings for mounting on the ceiling and projecting from the rear (using the translucent screen)?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [REAR] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: [AUTO] or [CEILING]
What are the menu item settings for portrait setting and projecting forward?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [FRONT] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: Set in accordance with the image to project.
What are the menu item settings for portrait setting and projecting from rear (using the translucent screen)?
Menu item: [FRONT/REAR], Setting value: [REAR] Menu item: [FLOOR/CEILING], Setting value: Set in accordance with the image to project.
In portrait setting, how do I display the on-screen menu vertically?
Go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] and change the [OSD ROTATION] setting.
How is the attitude of the projector automatically detected?
The projector has a built-in angle sensor. The attitude of the projector is automatically detected by setting [FLOOR/CEILING] to [AUTO] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].
What is the range of the installation attitude that is detected by the angle sensor built-in the projector?
Floor standing installation: 30° Ceiling mount installation: 30°
What parts are needed for installation?
The projector can be installed on the ceiling by combining the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) and the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
What Ceiling Mount Bracket should I use?
Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specified for this projector.
Where can I find information on installing and setting up the projector with the Ceiling Mount Bracket?
Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.
Who should install the Ceiling Mount Bracket?
To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified technician.
How do I install the projector?
Install the projector referring to the projected image size and projection distance. Image size and image position can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position.
How is the projection relation between the screen and the projector different when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached?
The projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses, when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030)”.
What is the following illustration based on?
The following illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been aligned to fit full in the screen.
What are the units in the following table?
m
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection distance and dimensions of the projected image.
| Abbreviation | Description |
|---|---|
| L (LW/LT)*1 | Projection distance |
| L1 | Lens protrusion dimension |
| SH | Projected image height |
| SW | Projected image width |
| H | Distance from the lens center to the bottom edge of the projected image |
| SD | Projected image size |
*1 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
What is the Projection lens Model No. and approximate dimension for L1?
| Projection lens Model No. | Dimension for L1 (approximate value) |
|---|---|
| Standard zoom lens | 0.043 |
| ET-DLE055 | 0.027 |
| ET-DLE085 | 0.084 |
| ET-DLE150 | 0.044 |
| ET-DLE250 | 0.045 |
| ET-DLE350 | 0.051 |
| ET-DLE450 | 0.095 |
What are the units in the following table?
m
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection distance and dimensions of the projected image when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached.
| Abbreviation | Description |
|---|---|
| SH | Projected image height |
| SW | Projected image width |
| SD | Projected image size |
| L1 | Projection distance (from the screen to the mirror reflection surface*1) |
| L2 | Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the tip of the lens) |
| L3 | Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the front surface of the projector) |
| L4 | Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the rear surface of the projector) |
| A1 | Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen bottom edge to the projector top) |
| A2 | Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen bottom edge to the projector bottom) |
*1 The mirror reflection surface cannot be seen from the outside because it is located inside the Fixed-focus Lens.
What are the formulas for calculating the distance between the projector and screen?
| Distance between projector and screen | Formula |
|---|---|
| L2 | = L1*1 + 0.023 |
| L3 | = L1*1 – 0.166 |
| L4 | = L1*1 – 0.704 |
| A2 | = A1*1 + 0.200 |
*1 For details of calculating values, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens”.
What should I do before setting up the projector?
Before setting up, read “Precautions for use”.
How should I install the projector, especially when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used?
Especially when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used, install the projector so that its back plane is parallel to the screen, making the projected image rectangular.
Can the vertical keystone distortion be corrected after the projector is installed?
The vertical keystone distortion in moderate range can be corrected with the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] → [KEYSTONE] → [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] even after the projector is installed.
Where can I find information on the range of vertical keystone distortion correction?
For the range that can be corrected, refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range”.
Can the geometric adjustment function be used when projecting the input signal rotated by 90° while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110?
The geometric adjustment function cannot be used when projecting the input signal rotated by 90° while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110.
What should I do to ensure that distortion does not occur in the projected image when installing the projector?
Follow these instructions so that distortion does not occur in the projected image.
- Use a flat screen.
- Install the projector so that the front side of the projector is parallel to the screen.
- Install the projector so that the image can be projected within the range of shift adjustment by moving the lens position.
Where can I set the 90° rotation of the image?
The 90° rotation of the image can be set in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [IMAGE ROTATION].
Why shouldn’t I use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room?
Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the projection lens surface.
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the [GEOMETRY] projection range.
| Description | [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) | [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above) | Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) | Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Screen | Image | Image | Image | Image |
| Projection distance | L2 | L2 | L2 | L2 |
| Arc radius | R2 | R2 | R2 | R2 |
| Arc center | Image | Image | Image | Image |
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the Standard status projection lens Model No.
| Projection lens Model No. | Only [KEYSTONE] used | [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together | Only [CURVED CORRECTION] used |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vertical keystone correction angle α (°) | Horizontal keystone correction angle β (°) | Vertical keystone correction angle α (°) | |
| — | — | — | — |
| Standard zoom lens | ±40 | ±15 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE030*1 | +5 / -0 | 0 | ― |
| ET-DLE055 | ±22 | ±15 | ±8 |
| ET-DLE085 | ±22 | ±15 | ±8 |
| ET-DLE150 | ±40 | ±15 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE250 | ±40 | ±15 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE350 | ±40 | ±15 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE450 | ±40 | ±15 | ±20 |
*1 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection lens Model No. when using the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) (Only for PT-RZ970).
| Projection lens Model No. | Only [KEYSTONE] used*1 | [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together | Only [CURVED CORRECTION] used |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vertical keystone correction angle α (°) | Horizontal keystone correction angle β (°) | Vertical keystone correction angle α (°) | |
| — | — | — | — |
| Standard zoom lens | ±40 | ±40 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE030*2 | +5 / -0 | 0 | ― |
| ET-DLE055 | ±22 | ±15 | ±8 |
| ET-DLE085 | ±22 | ±15 | ±8 |
| ET-DLE150 | ±40 | ±40 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE250 | ±40 | ±40 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE350 | ±45 | ±40 | ±20 |
| ET-DLE450 | ±45 | ±40 | ±20 |
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°. *2 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
What should I be aware of when [GEOMETRY] is used?
When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
What shape should the curved screen be?
Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
What should I be aware of about the adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items?
Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.
What is the error percentage in listed projection distances?
A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
What happens to the distance when [GEOMETRY] is used?
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size.
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection distance of each projection lens for PT‑RZ970 when the screen aspect ratio is 16:10. The unit of measurement is meters (m).
| Lens type | Standard zoom lens | Optional lens |
|---|---|---|
| Fixed-focus Lens | ||
| — | — | — |
| Projection lens Model No. | — | ET-DLE030*2 |
| Throw ratio*1 | 1.7-2.4:1 | 0.38:1 |
| Projected image size | Diagonal (SD) | Height (SH) |
| — | — | — |
| 1.27 (50") | 0.673 | 1.077 |
| 1.52 (60") | 0.808 | 1.292 |
| 1.78 (70") | 0.942 | 1.508 |
| 2.03 (80") | 1.077 | 1.723 |
| 2.29 (90") | 1.212 | 1.939 |
| 2.54 (100") | 1.346 | 2.154 |
| 3.05 (120") | 1.615 | 2.585 |
| 3.81 (150") | 2.019 | 3.231 |
| 5.08 (200") | 2.692 | 4.308 |
| 6.35 (250") | 3.365 | 5.385 |
| 7.62 (300") | 4.039 | 6.462 |
| 8.89 (350") | 4.712 | 7.539 |
| 10.16 (400") | 5.385 | 8.616 |
| 12.70 (500") | 6.731 | 10.770 |
| 15.24 (600") | 8.077 | 12.923 |
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size. *2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030)”
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection distance of each projection lens for PT-RZ970 when the screen aspect ratio is 16:10. The unit of measurement is meters (m).
| Lens type | Optional lens | Height position (H)*3 |
|---|---|---|
| Intermediate focus zoom lens | Long focus zoom lens | |
| — | — | — |
| Projection lens Model No. | ET-DLE250 | ET-DLE350 |
| Throw ratio*1 | 2.3-3.6:1 | 3.6-5.4:1 |
| Projected image size | Diagonal (SD) | Height (SH) |
| — | — | — |
| 1.27 (50") | 0.673 | 1.077 |
| 1.52 (60") | 0.808 | 1.292 |
| 1.78 (70") | 0.942 | 1.508 |
| 2.03 (80") | 1.077 | 1.723 |
| 2.29 (90") | 1.212 | 1.939 |
| 2.54 (100") | 1.346 | 2.154 |
| 3.05 (120") | 1.615 | 2.585 |
| 3.81 (150") | 2.019 | 3.231 |
| 5.08 (200") | 2.692 | 4.308 |
| 6.35 (250") | 3.365 | 5.385 |
| 7.62 (300") | 4.039 | 6.462 |
| 8.89 (350") | 4.712 | 7.539 |
| 10.16 (400") | 5.385 | 8.616 |
| 12.70 (500") | 6.731 | 10.770 |
| 15.24 (600") | 8.077 | 12.923 |
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size. *3 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
What does the following table describe?
The table describes the projection distance of each projection lens for PT-RZ970 when the screen aspect ratio is 16:9. The unit of measurement is meters (m).
| Lens type | Standard zoom lens | Optional lens |
|---|---|---|
| Fixed-focus Lens | ||
| — | — | — |
| Projection lens Model No. | — | ET-DLE030*2 |
| Throw ratio*1 | 1.7-2.4:1 | 0.38:1 |
| Projected image size | Diagonal (SD) | Height (SH) |
| — | — | — |
| 1.27 (50") | 0.623 | 1.107 |
| 1.52 (60") | 0.747 | 1.328 |
| 1.78 (70") | 0.872 | 1.550 |
| 2.03 (80") | 0.996 | 1.771 |
| 2.29 (90") | 1.121 | 1.992 |
| 2.54 (100") | 1.245 | 2.214 |
| 3.05 (120") | 1.494 | 2.657 |
| 3.81 (150") | 1.868 | 3.321 |
| 5.08 (200") | 2.491 | 4.428 |
| 6.35 (250") | 3.113 | 5.535 |
| 7.62 (300") | 3.736 | 6.641 |
| 8.89 (350") | 4.358 | 7.748 |
| 10.16 (400") | 4.981 | 8.855 |
| 12.70 (500") | 6.226 | 11.069 |
| 15.24 (600") | 7. |
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the standard zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
0.40:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE085 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
0.8:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE150 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.4-2.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE250 Intermediate focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
2.4-3.8:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE350 Long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
3.8-5.7:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE450 Ultra long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
5.6-9.0:1
What is the throw ratio based on when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
What is the throw ratio based on when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the standard zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
2.2-3.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
2.2-3.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
0.48:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE085 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE150 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.6-2.4:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE250 Intermediate focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
2.9-4.6:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE350 Long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
4.5-6.9:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE450 Ultra long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
6.8-10.8:1
What is the throw ratio based on when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
What is the throw ratio based on when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the standard zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
0.39:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE085 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
0.8:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE150 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.3-2.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE250 Intermediate focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
2.4-3.7:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE350 Long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
3.7-5.6:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE450 Ultra long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
5.5-8.9:1
What is the throw ratio based on when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
What is the throw ratio based on when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the standard zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
1.8-2.5:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens when the unit is in meters?
0.39:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE085 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
0.8:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE150 Short focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
1.3-2.0:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE250 Intermediate focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
2.4-3.8:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE350 Long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
3.7-5.6:1
When the screen aspect ratio is 16:9, what is the throw ratio of the ET-DLE450 Ultra long focus zoom lens when the unit is in meters?
5.6-8.9:1
What is the throw ratio based on when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.03 m (80") projected image size.
What is the throw ratio based on when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached when the unit is in meters?
The throw ratio is based on the value during projection of 2.54 m (100") projected image size.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses.
What is different about the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) when it is attached?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, the lens shift is not possible, therefore the height position (H) becomes SH/2.
How do I calculate the projection distance per projection lens?
To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the respective formula to calculate projection distance. The unit of all the formulae is m.
(Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.) When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.7-2.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.4906 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.1-2.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.6874 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.7-2.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.5320 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.1-2.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 2.3563 x SD – 0.0725
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.7-2.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 2.1393 x SD – 0.0725
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.6865 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.7056 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.9-1.2:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.7772 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.8498 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.8735 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.9-1.2:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.9621 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.3-1.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.1259 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.3-1.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.1572 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.6-2.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.2747 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.3-1.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.6243 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.3-1.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.6695 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.6-2.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.8388 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.3-3.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.9665 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.3-3.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 2.0212 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.7-4.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 2.2263 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.3-3.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 3.1059 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.3-3.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 3.1923 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.7-4.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 3.5161 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.6-5.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 3.1000 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.6-5.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 3.1862 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 4.3-6.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 3.5094 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.6-5.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 4.6843 x SD – 0.1346
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.6-5.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 4.8146 x SD – 0.1346
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 4.3-6.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 5.3030 x SD – 0.1346
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 5.4-8.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 4.6931 x SD – 0.3017
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 5.4-8.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 4.8236 x SD – 0.3017
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 6.5-10.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 5.3129 x SD – 0.3017
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 5.4-8.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 7.4193 x SD – 0.2991
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 5.4-8.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 7.6256 x SD – 0.2991
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE450 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 6.5-10.3:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 8.3992 x SD – 0.2991
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.6893 x SD – 0.0476
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.7084 x SD – 0.0476
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE055 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.7803 x SD – 0.0476
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L1) formula for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.38:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.3205 x SD + 0.0047
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L1) formula for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.38:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.3294 x SD + 0.0047
For the PT-RZ970, what is the projection distance (L1) formula for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.46:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.3628 x SD + 0.0047
What is the formula for distance between projector and screen (A1) for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.38:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.1977 x SD – 0.0721
What is the formula for distance between projector and screen (A1) for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.38:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.2304 x SD – 0.0721
What is the formula for distance between projector and screen (A1) for the ET-DLE030 Fixed-focus Lens with a throw ratio of 0.46:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.2238 x SD – 0.0721
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.8-2.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.5651 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.8-2.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.6086 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.2-3.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.7715 x SD – 0.0746
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.8-2.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 2.1855 x SD – 0.0725
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.8-2.5:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 2.2462 x SD – 0.0725
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for a standard zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.2-3.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 2.4736 x SD – 0.0725
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.7209 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.7409 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.0-1.2:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 0.8159 x SD – 0.0471
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 0.8923 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 0.8-1.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 0.9171 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE085 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.0-1.2:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.0100 x SD – 0.0442
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.4-2.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.1822 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.4-2.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.2151 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.6-2.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.3381 x SD – 0.0540
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.4-2.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 1.7055 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.4-2.0:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 1.7529 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE150 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 1.6-2.4:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 1.9304 x SD – 0.0498
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.4-3.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 2.0649 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.4-3.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 2.1223 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.9-4.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 2.3371 x SD – 0.0800
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.4-3.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 3.2612 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.4-3.8:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 3.3519 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE250 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 2.9-4.6:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 3.6912 x SD – 0.0792
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.8-5.7:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 3.2550 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.8-5.7:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 3.3455 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 4.5-6.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 3.6842 x SD – 0.1351
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.8-5.7:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:10?
= 4.9185 x SD – 0.1346
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 3.8-5.7:1 and an aspect ratio of 16:9?
= 5.0553 x SD – 0.1346
For the PT-RW930, what is the projection distance (L) formula for the ET-DLE350 zoom lens with a throw ratio of 4.5-6.9:1 and an aspect ratio of 4:3?
= 5.5671 x SD – 0.1346
What are the <DVI-D IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names?
| Outside view Pin No. | Signal name | Pin No. | Signal name |
|---|---|---|---|
| (1) | T.M.D.S data 2- | (13) | ― |
| (2) | T.M.D.S data 2+ | (14) | +5 V |
| (3) | T.M.D.S data 2/4 shield | (15) | GND |
| (4) | ― | (16) | Hot plug detection |
| (5) | ― | (17) | T.M.D.S data 0- |
| (6) | DDC clock | (18) | T.M.D.S data 0+ |
| (7) | DDC data | (19) | T.M.D.S data 0/5 shield |
| (8) | ― | (20) | ― |
| (9) | T.M.D.S data 1- | (21) | ― |
| (10) | T.M.D.S data 1+ | (22) | T.M.D.S clock shield |
| (11) | T.M.D.S data 1/3 shield | (23) | T.M.D.S clock+ |
| (12) | ― | (24) | T.M.D.S clock- |
What is a connecting example of AV equipment for the terminals: <HDMI IN>/<DVI-D IN>/<RGB 1 IN>?
A Blu-ray disc player, VCR (with built-in TBC), DVD player with HDMI terminal (HDCP).
What are some important considerations to take into account when connecting a VCR?
- Be sure to use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC), or use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
- The image may be disrupted when nonstandard burst signal is connected. In this case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the external devices.
What are some things to note about the <DVI-D IN> terminal?
- It may be necessary to switch the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN] → [EDID SELECT] depending on the connected external device when inputting DVI-D.
- The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected with HDMI and DVI-D compatible devices. However, some external devices may not be able to project images properly. Issues may include the image not displaying.
- For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
What are some things to note about the <HDMI IN> terminal?
- The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be displayed.
- The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
- It is necessary to switch the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [RGB IN] → [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] when inputting a video signal and the Y/C signal.
What kind of signal can the <SDI IN> terminal receive?
(Only for PT-RZ970) SD-SDI signal, HD-SDI signal, or 3G-SDI signal.
What is a connecting example for the <SDI IN> terminal?
A digital VCR for commercial use.
What are some things to note about the <SDI IN> terminal?
- The input format can be switched using the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
- Setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] may be necessary depending on the connected external device.
- Use a connection cable 5CFB or higher (such as 5CFB or 7CFB), or Belden 1694A or higher to properly transmit the image. Use a connection cable with a length of 100 m (328’1") or shorter.
When may an error in signal detection may occur and how can it be fixed?
An error in signal detection may occur when an unstable signal is connected. Use the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] to switch to a system that matches the signal format.
What are some important considerations to take into account when connecting the projector to a computer or external device?
- Use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially available shielded cables.
- Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected external device when DVI-D is input.
- For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
Can the <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal?
Yes, the <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be projected.
What are some additional things to note about the connection between a computer and the projector?
- The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.
- When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the <VD> terminal.
- If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate the projector.
What is a connecting example using DIGITAL LINK?
Twisted-pair-cable transmitters based on the communication standard HDBaseTTM such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) use twisted pair cables to transmit input images, Ethernet, and serial control signals, and the projector can input those digital signals to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal. You can connect a Blu-ray disc player, computer, and VCR to the transmitter with the appropriate cables. The control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
What are some important considerations to take into account when connecting a VCR via DIGITAL LINK?
- Always use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC), or use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
- The image may be disrupted when a nonstandard burst signal is connected. In this case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the external devices.
What are some important considerations to take into account when connecting a DIGITAL LINK?
-
Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. The image may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
-
For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
- Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
- Shielded type (including connectors)
- Straight-through
- Single wire
-
When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer. When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
-
Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
-
When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-pair-cable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause an image to be disrupted.
-
Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
-
To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector without any loops.
-
Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
-
When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
-
After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] is displayed in green, which indicates normal quality.
What are some things to note about the HDMI cable used for DIGITAL LINK?
- For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
- The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
What is the maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector?
The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328’1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492’2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. If this distance is exceeded, the image may be disrupted, or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication. Note that Panasonic does not support the use of the projector outside the maximum transmission distance. When connecting with the long reach, the video signal or distance that can be transmitted may be restricted, depending on the specification of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Where can I find information on twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector?
Visit the Panasonic website. Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
What functions can be used when constructing a multi-display by linking projected images from multiple projectors?
You can use the following functions by synchronizing multiple projectors using the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal.
- Contrast synchronization function: a linked screen with balanced contrast can be displayed by sharing the brightness level of the video signal being input to each projector.
- Shutter synchronization function: this function synchronizes the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function, including the fade-out/fade-in operation can be synchronized.
How do you use the contrast synchronization function?
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each synchronized projector as follows:
- Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF]. Set [MODE] to [MASTER] only on one projector that is synchronized. Set [MODE] to [SLAVE] for all other projectors.
- Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [CONTRAST SYNC] to [ON].
How do you use the shutter synchronization function?
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each synchronized projector as follows:
- Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF]. Set [MODE] to [MASTER] only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source within the linked projectors. Set [MODE] to [SLAVE] for all other projectors.
- Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON].
How do you connect multiple projectors when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function?
Connect all the projectors to be linked in a loop by daisy chain connection when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function. The number of linked projectors is limited to a maximum of 64 projectors.
What are some things to note about the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function?
-
The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.
-
For details on the settings of the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
-
The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items:
- The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
- The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
-
If there are any projectors that you do not want to synchronize within the linked projectors, set [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] individually.
How do I connect the power cord?
- Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector, and insert the connector completely in the correct direction (until you hear the side tabs click in place).
How do I remove the power cord?
- Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector is on the <OFF> side and remove the power plug from the outlet.
- Remove the power cord connector from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector while pressing the side tabs.
What do the different power indicator statuses mean?
| Power indicator | Projector status |
|---|---|
| <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> Off | The main power is switched off. |
| Red Lit | The power is switched off (standby mode). Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed. <br>The setting of the projector is as follows: <br> * The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF]. |
| Red Blinking | The power is switched off (standby mode). Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed. <br> The setting of the projector is as follows: <br> * The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON]. <br> * The indicator will change to a red light when the specified time has elapsed after the projector enters the standby mode if the projector is set as follows. The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD]. |
| Green Lit | Projecting. |
| Orange Lit | The projector is preparing to switch off. The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.) |
What are some things to note about the power indicator?
-
While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
-
For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on. Turn on the power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights/blinks in red.
-
The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights/blinks in red).
-
When the projector receives the signal from the remote control, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> will blink in the following color according to the status of the projector:
- When the projector is in projection mode: Green
- When the projector is in standby mode: Orange
However, if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the indicator will stay lit red and will not blink if the projector is in standby mode.
-
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), or while the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is operating, and the light source is turned off.
How do you switch on the projector?
- Connect the power cord to the projector.
- Connect the power plug to an outlet.
- Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power. The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights/blinks in red, and the projector enters standby mode.
- Press the power on <b> button. The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights in green, and the image is soon projected on the screen.
What are some things to note about switching on the projector?
- A warm-up period of up to approximately five minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed when the projector is switched on at around 0 °C (32 °F). The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights in red during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator <TEMP> turns off, and the projection starts.
- If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than five minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has occurred, and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. In such cases, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C (32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then turn on the power again.
- It will take longer to start the projection when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] compared to when it is set to [NORMAL].
- Projection will start in approximately one second when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON] and if the power is turned on within a specified time after going into the standby mode. The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
- When the power is turned on or an input signal is switched, you may hear a high-frequency driving sound. This is not a malfunction.
- If the power was turned off at the previous use by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by using the breaker directly while projecting, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> lights up in green and an image is projected after a while when the power is turned on by pressing the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by turning the breaker on with the power plug connected to the outlet. This applies only when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY].
What happens when the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed?
The focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed. In other situations, you can change the settings by menu operations. If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the previous screen.
How do you adjust the focus during initial setup?
- Press asqw to adjust the focus.
- Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
How do you set the display language during initial setup?
- Press as to select the display language.
- Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
What is the initial setting for operation settings about?
Set the items regarding the operating method depending on the duration of use and the usage of the projector. After completing the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu. If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance of the light source decreases by half may shorten, or the luminance may decrease. This initial setting (operation setting) is prepared to complete the settings at once during the installation when the operation of the projector is predetermined. When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, do not change the setting in the initial setting (operation setting), but press the <ENTER> button and proceed to the next initial setting (installation setting). Request to the person responsible for this projector (such as a person in charge of equipment or operation) when it is necessary to change the setting.
What are some things to note about operation settings?
- The preceding initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase. If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the settings before execution are displayed in [OPERATING MODE] and [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
- For the relationship between the luminance and the runtime, refer to “Interrelation of luminance and runtime”.
- For details on each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING].
How do you set the operating mode during initial setup?
- Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- Set [OPERATING MODE] to [NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] when using the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858’) or higher above sea level.
- Proceed to step 5 when [NORMAL], [ECO], [QUIET1], [QUIET2], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3] is selected.
- Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
- Press qw to adjust.
What are the different operating modes and what do they do?
| Mode | Description | Estimated Runtime |
|---|---|---|
| [NORMAL] | Set this item when high luminance is required. | 20,000 hours |
| [ECO] | The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. | 24,000 hours |
| [QUIET1] | The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low noise is prioritized. | 20,000 hours |
| [QUIET2] | The luminance will decrease compared to [QUIET1], but select this item when operating the projector with less noise. | 20,000 hours |
| [LONG LIFE1] | The luminance will decrease compared to [ECO], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. | 43,000 hours |
| [LONG LIFE2] | The luminance will decrease compared to [LONG LIFE1], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. | 61,000 hours |
| [LONG LIFE3] | The luminance will decrease compared to [LONG LIFE2], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. | 87,000 hours |
| [USER1] | [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually. | |
| [USER2] | [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually. | |
| [USER3] | [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually. |
Note: The runtime is an estimation when the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to .
How do I switch off the projector?
- Press the power off button.
- The power indicator will light in orange.
- The cooling fan will operate for a while to cool down the projector, and the power indicator will turn off.
- Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet after the power indicator turns off and the cooling fan stops operating.
- Disconnect the power cord from the projector.
What are some things to note when switching off the projector?
- Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. The projector consumes a slight amount of power even when it is switched off.
- The projector may not operate for about 5 seconds after the projector is turned off, even if the power is switched on. Switch the power on again after the power indicator lights up/blinks in red.
- The projector may not operate properly if the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet immediately after the projector is switched off. In this case, switch the power on again, and then switch it off correctly.
How do I check the lamp operating time?
- Press the <INFO> button to display the information screen. The currently selected input and various information is displayed.
- Press the <INFO> button again to display the next information screen. The lamp operating time, filter operating time, etc. is displayed. You can check the lamp operating time.
- Press the <INFO> button again to return to the previous screen.
How do I replace the lamp?
- Switch off the projector and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. Wait for at least 60 minutes until the lamp has cooled down sufficiently.
- Loosen the screws and remove the lamp cover.
- Pull the lamp handle to remove the lamp.
- Align the new lamp unit with the projector and push in, and then push the handle in.
- Tighten the screws to attach the lamp cover.
What are some things to note about replacing the lamp?
- Never touch the lamp or the glass part of the lamp directly with bare hands as this will decrease the lamp life. If you accidentally touch it, wipe it clean with a dry cloth dampened with alcohol.
- Replacing the lamp with a lamp other than the specified one may cause a fire hazard or a malfunction. Always use the specified lamp.
- Dispose of used lamps properly according to local regulations.
- If the lamp breaks, ventilate the room thoroughly. Do not inhale lamp debris or dust. Touching the debris with bare hands can cause health problems.
- The lamp contains mercury. Dispose of the lamp according to federal, state, and local laws.
How do I clean the air filter?
- Switch off the projector and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
- Remove the air filter cover.
- Remove the air filter.
- Clean the air filter using a vacuum cleaner. You can also wash the air filter with neutral detergent and water and dry it well in the shade before replacing it.
- Insert the air filter into the projector.
- Attach the air filter cover.
What are some things to note about the air filter?
- It is recommended that the air filter be cleaned every 500 hours of use. If the operating environment is very dusty, it may be necessary to clean the filter more frequently.
- Make sure that the air filter is set properly. If it is not set properly, dust will enter the projector, which will reduce the lamp life or cause a malfunction.
How do I clean the projector cabinet?
- Switch off the projector and disconnect the power cord from the projector.
- Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth. If it is very dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution, and then wipe it with a dry cloth.
What are some things to note about cleaning the projector cabinet?
- Do not use benzine, thinner, or any other volatile solvent to clean the cabinet as this may deform or discolor the cabinet.
- Be careful not to scratch the cabinet when cleaning.
- Do not allow water or detergent solution to enter the projector.
- When the projector is moved to another location after it has been used for a while, clean the projector beforehand as dirt and dust may have accumulated on the projector and may ignite if they come into contact with the lamp.
What is the menu screen?
The menu screen allows you to adjust and set up the projector using the remote control. It comprises the main menu and submenu.
How do I display the menu screen?
- Press the <MENU> button. The main menu will be displayed.
- Press as to select the desired menu, and then press qw or the <ENTER> button. The submenu corresponding to the selected menu will be displayed.
How do I select an item and change a setting?
-
Press as to select the desired item.
-
Press qw to select the desired setting. When a numerical value is displayed, press 0-9 to select the desired value.
- When [AUTO] is selected, press the <ENTER> button to execute the automatic adjustment function.
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The setting will be applied, and you will return to the previous menu.
- When [RESET] is selected, press the <ENTER> button to reset the setting to its default value.
How do I exit the menu screen?
- Press the <MENU> button.
What are some things to note about the menu screen?
- A password can be set for the menu operation.
- The menu screen may not be displayed depending on the input signal.
- You cannot operate the menu screen while adjusting using the adjustment buttons, while adjusting the lens, or while the message screen is displayed.
How do I select the input signal?
- Press the <INPUT> button. The [INPUT SELECT] menu is displayed.
- Press as to select the desired input, and then press the <ENTER> button.
What are the input terminal keys on the remote control?
The remote control has input terminal keys, <HDMI1>, <HDMI2>, <DVI-D>, <RGB1>, <RGB2>, <YC>, <SDI> (Only for PT-RZ970), and <DIGITAL LINK>, which you can use to select the input signal directly.
How do I freeze the screen?
- Press the freeze button. The screen will freeze, and the indicator on the freeze button will light up.
How do I unfreeze the screen?
- Press the freeze button again. The screen will be unfrozen, and the indicator on the freeze button will turn off.
What is the test pattern?
You can display the test pattern to adjust the focus and size of the screen, or to check the overall projected image.
How do I display the test pattern?
- Press the <TEST PATTERN> button. The test pattern will be displayed.
How do I select the test pattern?
- Press qw. The type of test pattern changes.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The setting is applied and returns to the previous screen.
How do I hide the test pattern?
- Press the <TEST PATTERN> button. The test pattern will disappear.
What are the types of test patterns?
- White
- Black
- Gray
- Crosshatch
- Multi burst
- Linearity
- Color bars
- 19 point
How do I adjust the focus, zoom, and shift?
- Adjust the zoom and focus of the projected image using the zoom lever and focus ring on the projection lens.
- Press the <SHIFT> buttons to adjust the position of the projected image vertically.
- While pressing the <LENS> button, press the <SHIFT> buttons to adjust the position of the projected image horizontally.
What are some things to note when adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift?
- When the projected image is shifted up and down or left and right, the edge of the image may be distorted. If the edge of the image is distorted, adjust the lens shift so that distortion does not occur.
- When using an interchangeable lens, it is necessary to re-adjust the focus, zoom, and shift.
- When using the optional zoom lens (e.g., ET-DLE030), you can operate the zoom, focus, and shift functions from the remote control by switching the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in the [LENS CONTROL] menu.
How do I correct keystone distortion?
When the screen is tilted vertically, projected images become trapezoidal. This is called “keystone distortion.” You can correct the keystone distortion manually or automatically.
How do I correct keystone distortion manually?
- Press the <AUTO SETUP> button to display the [AUTO SETUP] menu.
- Press as to select [KEYSTONE (MANUAL)], and then press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to adjust the top and bottom of the image.
- Press qw to adjust the left and right sides of the image.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The setting is applied, and you return to the previous screen.
How do I correct keystone distortion automatically?
- Press the <AUTO SETUP> button. The [AUTO SETUP] menu is displayed.
- Press as to select [KEYSTONE (AUTO)], and then press the <ENTER> button. Automatic keystone correction starts. When completed, the screen returns to the previous screen.
What are some things to note when correcting keystone distortion?
- When keystone correction is applied, the aspect ratio of the projected image may change slightly.
- Depending on the screen conditions and the input signal, keystone correction may not be performed properly. If keystone correction is not performed properly, correct the distortion manually.
- If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [AUTO SETUP] → [KEYSTONE] is set to [AUTO], keystone correction is performed automatically every time the input signal or projection lens is changed.
How do you increase the maximum level of brightness correction?
Press w. Increases the maximum level of brightness correction.
How do you decrease the maximum level of brightness correction?
Press q. Decreases the maximum level of brightness correction.
How do you adjust the light output?
- Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
- Press qw to adjust.
What happens when you press w to adjust the light output?
The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
What happens when you press q to adjust the light output?
The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
How do you switch the constant mode item?
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the constant mode options?
- [OFF] Does not perform the brightness control (correction by the brightness sensor).
- [AUTO] Performs the brightness control (correction by the brightness sensor). When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is automatically corrected.
- [PC] Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
Where can you find the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”?
“Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
What happens if the brightness control is not to be performed (when [OFF] is selected)?
Proceed to Step 15).
What happens when [PC] is selected?
Proceed to Step 11).
How do you switch the link item?
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the link options?
- [OFF] Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other projectors. The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT OUTPUT] smaller.
- [GROUP A] [GROUP B] [GROUP C] [GROUP D] Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization. Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function. Up to eight projectors can be registered and synchronized in one group.
How do you set the calibration time?
- Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
- Press the number (<0> – <9>) buttons on the remote control to enter the time.
What will the projector do once you enter the calibration time?
The projector will go into the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
How do you select the hour or minute during calibration time setup?
Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”.
When is [CALIBRATION TIME] set?
[CALIBRATION TIME] is set when the cursor is moved from [CALIBRATION TIME] using as.
What is measured at the specified calibration time?
Brightness and color are measured at the specified time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate during measurement.
How do you set the calibration time if the time is not to be specified?
Use as to select [CALIBRATION TIME] (time is not flashing) and press the <DEFAULT> button if the time is not to be specified.
How do you switch the calibration message item?
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the calibration message options?
- [ON] Displays message during calibration.
- [OFF] Does not display the message during calibration.
How do you proceed to the initial setting?
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
How can the projector be operated at arbitrary brightness and duration of use?
The projector can be operated at arbitrary brightness and duration of use by combining the settings of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
What are the values of the luminance and runtime?
Values of the luminance and runtime are rough estimations.
What should you do depending on your desired duration of use and brightness of the projected image?
Make the initial setting (operation setting) depending on your desired duration of use and brightness of the projected image.
What might make the runtime shorter than the estimation?
The runtime may be shorter than the estimation due to the influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc.
What is the duration of use referred to as?
The duration of use is referred to as the runtime when you use the projector successively.
What is the duration of use?
The duration of use is an estimated duration and is not the warranty period.
What may be required if the runtime exceeds 20,000 hours?
If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
How do you set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode?
Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode. Refer to “Installation mode” for details. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].
How do you change the projection method (FRONT/REAR, FLOOR/CEILING) if the screen display is upside down or inverted?
- Press qw to switch the setting.
- Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
How do you set the operation mode during standby?
Set the operation mode during standby. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use the network function during standby. To keep power consumption low during standby, set this item to [ECO]. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE].
What happens when the standby mode is set to ECO?
When set to ECO, network functions and SERIAL OUT terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not available during standby.
How do you change the standby mode?
- Press qw to switch the setting.
- Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
When is the preceding initial setting screen displayed?
The preceding initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase. When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the [STANDBY MODE] setting before executing is displayed.
How do you set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image?
Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image. After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN SETTING].
How do you set the screen format?
- Press qw to switch the setting. The setting will change each time you press the button.
- Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].
- Press qw to adjust.
- Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
When can’t you select or adjust [SCREEN POSITION]?
[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10] in PT-RZ970 or PT-RW930, or when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3] in PT-RX110.
How do you set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector?
Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].
How do you change the time zone setting?
- Press qw to switch the setting.
- Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
What is the factory default setting for the time zone of the projector?
In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korea Standard Time). Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
How do you set the local date and time?
Set the local date and time. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME]. To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically”.
How do you set the local date and time?
- Press as to select an item.
- Press qw to switch the setting.
- Press the <ENTER> button. Confirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
What is it recommended to do before the focus is adjusted?
It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
How do you roughly adjust the focus of the projected image?
Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the projected image.
How do you change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode?
Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode. Refer to “Navigating through the menu” for the operation of the menu screen.
How do you select the input?
Press the input selection button (<RGB1> and <RGB2>, or <RGB1/2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI‑D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) to select the input. (SDI input is supported only for PT‑RZ970.)
How do you adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector?
Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet.
How do you adjust the position of the projected image?
Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the projected image.
What should you do if the input signal is the analog RGB signal or the DVI-D/HDMI signal?
If the input signal is the analog RGB signal or the DVI‑D/HDMI signal, press the <AUTO SETUP> button.
How do you adjust the image size to match the screen?
Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the image size to match the screen.
How do you fine tune the focus?
Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.
How do you adjust the zoom to match the projected image size to the screen?
Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom to match the projected image size to the screen.
When is the focus adjustment screen displayed?
When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, and then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed. Refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” for details.
How do you switch off the projector?
- Press the power standby <v> button. The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. (Or press the power standby <v> button again.) Projection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> on the projector body lights in orange. (The fan keeps running.)
- Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> of the projector body lights/ blinks in red.
- Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
What happens for approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off?
For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on.
What happens to the power consumption when the projector is switched off?
Even when the power standby <v> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main power of the projector is on. Usage of some functions is restricted but the power consumption during the standby mode is conserved when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
How else can the power be turned off while projecting?
While projecting, the power can be turned off by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch, or by directly using the breaker under conditions where the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be switched off/on easily such as while installing on the ceiling. However, the settings or adjustments performed right before the power is turned off may not be reflected.
How do you start projecting?
Check the external device connection and the power cord connection, and turn on the power to start projection. Select the image to project, and adjust appearance of the projected image.
How can the input of the image to project be switched?
The input of the image to project can be switched. The input for projection can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel.
How do you select the input signal?
Press the input selection button (<RGB1/2> or <RGB1> and <RGB2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI‑D>, <VIDEO>, <SDI>, <HDMI>) on the remote control or the control panel.
What does the <RGB1/2> button do?
Switches the input to RGB1 or RGB2. Switches to the other input when one input has already been selected. The image of the signal input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal is projected. Input selection can be fixed to RGB1 or RGB2 using the [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
What does the <RGB1> button do?
Switches the input to RGB1. The image of the signal input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal (<R/PR/VIDEO>, <G/Y>, <B/PB/C>, <SYNC/ HD>, <VD>) is projected.
What does the <RGB2> button do?
Switches the input to RGB2. The image of the signal input to the <RGB 2 IN> terminal is projected.
What does the <DIGITAL LINK> button do?
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK. The image of the signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal is projected.
What does the <DVI-D> button do?
Switches the input to DVI-D. The image of the signal input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal is projected.
What does the <SDI> button do?
Switches the input to SDI. The image of the signal input to the <SDI IN> terminal is projected.
What does the <HDMI> button do?
Switches the input to HDMI. The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN> terminal is projected.
What is only supported for the PT-RZ970?
SDI input is supported only for PT-RZ970.
What may happen depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back?
Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back. Set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
What should you confirm and switch to from the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT]?
Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].
What happens when the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/ LAN> terminal?
When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/ LAN> terminal, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <DIGITAL LINK> button is pressed. The input can also be changed using the RS-232C control command. For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
What should you set in accordance with the signal input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?
Set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [RGB IN] → [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] in accordance with the signal input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
When should you adjust the focus, zoom, and shift?
If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is correctly installed, adjust the focus, zoom, and shift. This section describes the adjustment method when anything other than the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used, refer to “Adjusting the lens position and focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used”.
How do you adjust the focus, zoom, and shift using the control panel?
- Press the <LENS> button on the control panel. Pressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
- Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
How do you adjust the focus, zoom, and shift using the remote control?
- Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.
- <FOCUS> button: Adjusts focus.
- <ZOOM> button: Adjusts zoom.
- <SHIFT> button: Adjusts shift.
- Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
What should you not do during the lens shift operation?
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in the opening around the lens. Your hand may be caught in between, resulting to injury.
When is the zoom adjustment screen displayed but will not operate?
The zoom adjustment screen is displayed but it will not operate when a projection lens with no zoom function is attached.
What should you not do when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is used?
When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is used, do not perform the shift adjustment, and use the projector with the lens position at the home position.
How can you perform the adjustment faster?
The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw for approximately six seconds or longer while adjusting the focus, or for approximately three seconds or longer while adjusting the shift.
What is recommended to do before the focus is adjusted?
It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
What is displayed in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the displayed characters are unreadable due to incorrect focus?
Only [FOCUS] is displayed in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the displayed characters are unreadable due to incorrect focus. (Factory default) The displayed color of [FOCUS] differs depending on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD DESIGN].
What may be needed when the projector is switched off during the shift adjustment?
When the projector is switched off during the shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the projector is switched on.
What will be displayed during the next shift adjustment when the main power is switched off during shift adjustment?
When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment, the lens calibration error screen will be displayed during the next shift adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS CALIBRATION].
What should you do when the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed?
When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
How do you adjust the lens position and focus after attaching the projection lens when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used?
After attaching the projection lens, adjust the lens position and the focus with the projector correctly installed against the screen. The focus balance between the center and periphery of the projected image will differ depending on the size of the projected image when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached. Adjust the focus balance of the periphery with the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) as necessary.
How do you adjust the lens position and focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used?
- Move the lens to the ET-DLE030 lens standard position. While the shift adjustment screen is displayed, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to display the [HOME POSITION] screen. Select [DLE030] to move the lens to the lens standard position. Refer to “Setting the lens position” for details.
- Adjust the focus at the center of projected image. For the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift”.
- Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.
- Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.
What is the projected image size and scale shown on the periphery focus adjustment ring?
The projected image size and scale shown on the periphery focus adjustment ring are an approximate guide.
How do you move the lens position to the home position or the lens standard position?
To move the lens position to the home position or the lens standard position, perform the following procedure:
- Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the shift adjustment screen is displayed. The [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [NORMAL] Moves the lens to the home position. Select this item when replacing or removing the projection lens. Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is used for projection.
- [DLE030] Moves the lens to the ET-DLE030 lens standard position. Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is used for projection.
- Press the <ENTER> button. [PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the lens position returns to the home position or the lens standard position.
What should you do within approximately 5 seconds after the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed?
Complete the operation within approximately 5 seconds after the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed. The [HOME POSITION] screen will disappear after time limit.
When is the home position of the lens used and is it the optical center of the screen?
The home position of the lens is used when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is being stored, and it is not the optical center of the screen.
How else can you display the [HOME POSITION] screen?
You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the remote control for at least three seconds.
How do I adjust the lens position shift (optical shift)?
Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range. The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range. This is because the shift of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts. Projection position can be adjusted with the optical axis shift function based on the position of the projected screen in the home position (standard projection position).
What is the lens type?
Zoom Lens
What are the standard zoom lens types?
- ET‑DLE150
- ET‑DLE250
- ET‑DLE350
- ET‑DLE450
- ET-DLE085
What should I do if the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached?
When the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE055) is attached, do not use the shift adjustment, and use the projector with the lens position at the home position.
What should I do if the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached?
When the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-DLE030) is attached, it can be used with the shift adjustment based on the projected image position in the lens standard position within the range that the edge of the projected image is not blocked by the projector body.
How do I use the shutter function on the remote control?
-
Press the <SHUTTER> button.
- The image disappears.
- This operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
-
Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
- The image is displayed.
What will the power indicator look like while the shutter function is in use?
The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY ®> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).
How do I set the fade-in/fade-out time of the image?
The fade-in/fade-out time of the image can be set by the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING].
What may happen to the light source when the shutter function is used in the operating environment temperature of around 0 °C (32 °F)?
The light source may be lit dimly due to warm up when the shutter function is used in the operating environment temperature of around 0 °C (32 °F).
How do I use the on-screen display function?
-
Press the <ON SCREEN> button.
- Turns off (hides) the on-screen display.
-
Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
- Cancels the hide condition of the on-screen display.
How do I cancel the hide condition of the on-screen display?
The hide condition of the on-screen display can also be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden).
How do I use the automatic setup function?
- Press the <AUTO SETUP> button.
- [COMPLETE] is displayed when it has completed without any problem.
- This operation can be also performed by pressing the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel.
What type of image is recommended when performing the automatic adjustment?
It is recommended to input an image with bright white borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white characters when the automatic adjustment is being performed. Avoid using images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.
What may happen to the clock phase even if the automatic setup has been completed without any incident?
The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident.
How do I adjust the clock phase?
Adjust the [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE].
What should I do if an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input and [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment may not be performed properly even when [COMPLETE] appears?
Adjust the following settings:
- [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [INPUT RESOLUTION]
- [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE]
- [POSITION] menu → [SHIFT]
How do I adjust special signals?
Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [AUTO SETUP].
Is automatic adjustment possible on all computer models?
Automatic adjustment may not be possible depending on the computer model.
Is automatic adjustment possible for the synchronization signal for composite sync or SYNC ON GREEN?
Automatic adjustment may not be possible for the synchronization signal for composite sync or SYNC ON GREEN.
Why might the image be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment?
Image may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
When is adjustment required?
Adjustment is required for each input signal.
How do I cancel automatic adjustment?
Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic adjustment operation.
What may happen if the automatic setup function is used while the moving image is being input, even if a signal possible to perform the automatic setup is being input?
It may not be able to adjust correctly if the automatic setup function is used while the moving image is being input. [INCOMPLETE] may be displayed, or the adjustment may not be completed correctly even if [COMPLETE] is displayed.
How do I use the function button?
- Press the <FUNCTION> button.
How do I assign functions to the <FUNCTION> button?
Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
What functions can be assigned to the <FUNCTION> button?
- [P IN P]
- [SUB MEMORY]
- [SYSTEM SELECTOR]
- [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
- [FREEZE]
- [WAVEFORM MONITOR]
- [ASPECT]
- [PROJECTION METHOD]
How do I display the internal test pattern?
- Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
- Press qw to select the test pattern.
How else can test patterns be displayed?
Test patterns can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” for details.
Will settings of position, size, and other factors be reflected in test patterns?
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments.
How do I use the status function?
- Press the <STATUS> button.
- The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
How else can I display the projector status?
The projector status can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] for details.
How do I set the ID number of the remote control?
- Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
- Within five seconds, press the two‑digit ID number set on the projector using the number (<0> ‑ <9>) buttons.
- When the ID number is set to [ALL], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector.
Why shouldn’t I press the <ID SET> button on the remote control carelessly?
Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> – <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
Will the ID number set on the remote control be stored?
The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Can I control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector body when the ID number of the remote control is set to ?
When the ID number of the remote control is set to , you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector body, as same as when [ALL] is set.
How do I set the ID number of the projector body?
Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
How do I navigate through the menu?
-
Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
- The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
-
Press as to select an item from the main menu.
- The selected item is highlighted in yellow.
-
Press the <ENTER> button.
- The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
-
Press as to select a sub‑menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
- Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A B C
- For some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
What happens if I press the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed?
Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
Can all items and functions be adjusted or used for certain signals input to the projector?
Some items or functions may not be adjusted or used for certain signals to be input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set. If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.
Can some items be adjusted even if signals are not input?
Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
What happens to the individual adjustment screen if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds?
Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.
What does the cursor color depend on?
The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD DESIGN]. The selected item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
How is the on-screen menu displayed in the portrait setting?
In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
How do I display the on-screen menu vertically in the portrait setting?
To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD ROTATION].
How do I reset adjustment values to the factory default?
- Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
Can I reset all the settings to the factory default at a time?
You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
How do I reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time?
To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE].
Can all items be reset to the factory default settings when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed?
Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those items individually.
What does the triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicate?
The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular mark varies according to the selected input signals.
What are the Main menu items?
| Main menu item | Page |
|---|---|
| [PICTURE] | 81 |
| [POSITION] | 89 |
| [ADVANCED MENU] | 94 |
| [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] | 99 |
| [DISPLAY OPTION] | 100 |
| [PROJECTOR SETUP] | 119 |
| [P IN P] | 141 |
| [TEST PATTERN] | 143 |
| [SIGNAL LIST] | 144 |
| [SECURITY] | 147 |
| [NETWORK] | 151 |
What are the sub-menu items for [PICTURE]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [PICTURE MODE] | [GRAPHIC]*1 | 81 |
| [CONTRAST] | \ | 81 |
| [BRIGHTNESS] | \ | 81 |
| [COLOR] | *2 | 82 |
| [TINT] | \ | 82 |
| [COLOR TEMPERATURE] | [DEFAULT]*2 | 82 |
| [WHITE GAIN] | [+10] | 84 |
| [GAMMA] | [DEFAULT] | 84 |
| [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] | [OFF]*2 | 85 |
| [SHARPNESS] | [+6]*2 | 85 |
| [NOISE REDUCTION] | [OFF]*2 | 86 |
| [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] | *2 | 86 |
| [SYSTEM SELECTOR] | [YPBPR]*1 | 87 |
*1 Depends on the signal input. *2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].
What are the sub-menu items for [POSITION]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [SHIFT] | ― | 89 |
| [ASPECT] | [DEFAULT]*1 | 89 |
| [ZOOM] | ― | 90 |
| [CLOCK PHASE] | *1 | 91 |
| [GEOMETRY] | [OFF] | 91 |
*1 Depends on the signal input.
What are the sub-menu items for [ADVANCED MENU]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] | [AUTO]*1 | 94 |
| [BLANKING] | ― | 94 |
| [INPUT RESOLUTION] | ― | 95 |
| [CLAMP POSITION] | *1 | 95 |
| [EDGE BLENDING] | [OFF] | 95 |
| [FRAME RESPONSE] | [NORMAL] | 97 |
| [RASTER POSITION] | ― | 98 |
*1 Depends on the signal input.
What is the factory default setting?
The factory default setting varies depending on the selected input terminal.
What are the details for [DISPLAY LANGUAGE]?
Details (x page 99)
What are the sub-menu items for [DISPLAY OPTION]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [COLOR MATCHING] | [OFF] | 100 |
| [COLOR CORRECTION] | [OFF] | 101 |
| [SCREEN SETTING] | ― | 101 |
| [AUTO SIGNAL] | [OFF] | 102 |
| [AUTO SETUP] | ― | 102 |
| [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] | ― | 103 |
| [RGB IN] | ― | 104 |
| [DVI-D IN] | ― | 105 |
| [HDMI IN] | ― | 107 |
| [DIGITAL LINK IN] | ― | 108 |
| [SDI IN]*1 | ― | 109 |
| [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] | ― | 110 |
| [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] | ― | 112 |
| [IMAGE ROTATION] | [OFF] | 113 |
| [BACK COLOR] | [BLUE] | 113 |
| [STARTUP LOGO] | [DEFAULT LOGO] | 113 |
| [UNIFORMITY] | ― | 114 |
| [SHUTTER SETTING] | ― | 115 |
| [FREEZE] | ― | 116 |
| [WAVEFORM MONITOR] | [OFF] | 116 |
| [CUT OFF] | ― | 118 |
*1 Only for PT-RZ970
What are the sub-menu items for [PROJECTOR SETUP]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [PROJECTOR ID] | [ALL] | 119 |
| [PROJECTION METHOD] | ― | 119 |
| [OPERATION SETTING] | ― | 120 |
| [LIGHT OUTPUT] | [100.0%] | 124 |
| [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] | ― | 125 |
| [STANDBY MODE] | [NORMAL] | 129 |
| [QUICK STARTUP] | [OFF] | 129 |
| [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] | [DISABLE] | 130 |
| [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] | [DISABLE] | 130 |
| [INITIAL STARTUP] | [LAST MEMORY] | 130 |
| [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] | [LAST USED] | 130 |
| [DATE AND TIME] | ― | 131 |
| [SCHEDULE] | [OFF] | 132 |
| [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] | ― | 134 |
| [RS-232C] | ― | 135 |
| [REMOTE2 MODE] | [DEFAULT] | 137 |
| [FUNCTION BUTTON] | ― | 137 |
| [LENS CALIBRATION] | [NORMAL] | 138 |
| [STATUS] | ― | 138 |
| [SAVE ALL USER DATA] | ― | 139 |
| [LOAD ALL USER DATA] | ― | 139 |
| [INITIALIZE] | ― | 140 |
| [SERVICE PASSWORD] | ― | 140 |
What are the details for [P IN P]?
Details (x page 141)
What are the details for [TEST PATTERN]?
Details (x page 143)
What are the details for [SIGNAL LIST]?
Details (x page 144)
What are the sub-menu items for [SECURITY]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [SECURITY PASSWORD] | [OFF] | 147 |
| [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] | ― | 147 |
| [DISPLAY SETTING] | [OFF] | 147 |
| [TEXT CHANGE] | ― | 148 |
| [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] | ― | 148 |
| [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] | ― | 149 |
What are the sub-menu items for [NETWORK]?
| Sub-menu item | Factory default | Page |
|---|---|---|
| [DIGITAL LINK MODE] | [AUTO] | 151 |
| [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] | ― | 151 |
| [NETWORK SETUP] | ― | 152 |
| [NETWORK CONTROL] | ― | 152 |
| [NETWORK STATUS] | ― | 153 |
| [DIGITAL LINK MENU] | ― | 153 |
| [Art-Net SETUP] | [OFF] | 153 |
| [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] | \ | 154 |
| [Art-Net STATUS] | ― | 154 |
Can all items be adjusted or used for certain signal formats input to the projector?
Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.
What does the factory default setting vary on?
The factory default setting varies depending on the selected input terminal.
How do you switch to the desired picture mode?
- Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
- Press qw. The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available picture modes?
- [STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.
- [CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
- [NATURAL] The image becomes sRGB compliant.
- [REC709] The image becomes Rec.709 compliant when the setting other than [PICTURE MODE] is set to the factory default.
- [DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
- [DYNAMIC] The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.
- [GRAPHIC] The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer.
What is the factory default picture mode?
The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for still image input signals and [STANDARD] for movie-based input signals.
What is Rec.709?
Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709” and is a color standard of high-vision broadcasting.
What is DICOM?
DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and display images should not be used for medical purposes such as diagnosis.
How do you save the selected picture mode as the default value for when a new signal is input?
While the item in [PICTURE MODE] is selected, press the <ENTER> button to save as the default value for when a new signal is input. The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in the [PICTURE] menu is saved.
How do you adjust the contrast of the colors?
- Press as to select [CONTRAST].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
What is the adjustment range for contrast?
-31 – +31
How do you make the screen brighter?
Press w.
How do you make the screen darker?
Press q.
How do you adjust the black level?
Adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.
How do you adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image?
- Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
How do you increase the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen?
Press w.
How do reduce the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen?
Press q.
How do you adjust the color saturation of the projected image?
- Press as to select [COLOR].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
How do you deepen colors?
Press w.
How do you weaken colors?
Press q.
How do you adjust the skin tone in the projected image?
- Press as to select [TINT].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
How do you adjust skin tone toward greenish color?
Press w.
How do you adjust skin tone toward reddish purple?
Press q.
How do you switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish?
- Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available color temperature options?
- [DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
- [USER1] Adjusts white balance as desired.
- [USER2]
- [3200K] – [9300K] Sets the value in increments of 100 K. Select an item so that images become natural.
When can you not select [DEFAULT] color temperature?
[DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.].
When is the color temperature fixed to [USER1]?
This item is fixed to [USER1] when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] is set to anything other than [OFF].
What are the color temperature numerical values?
The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.
How do you adjust desired white balance?
- Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
- Press qw to adjust the level.
How do you adjust the color levels for white balance?
| Item | Operation | Adjustment Range of adjustment |
|---|---|---|
| [RED] | Press w. Deepens red. <br> Press q. Weakens red. | [WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 – +255 (factory default is +255) <br> [WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 – +127 (factory default is 0) |
| [GREEN] | Press w. Deepens green. <br> Press q. Weakens green. | |
| [BLUE] | Press w. Deepens blue. <br> Press q. Weakens blue. |
How do you adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly?
All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.
How do you adjust to desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings?
- Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select anything other than [DEFAULT], [USER1], or [USER2].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2]. The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The confirmation screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten. The data is not overwritten when [CANCEL] is selected with qw and the <ENTER> button is pressed. The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
- Press qw to adjust the level.
What happens when the color temperature has been changed?
When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.
How do you change the name of [USER1] or [USER2]?
- Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
- Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. The name set to color temperature is changed.
What happens to the display of [USER1] or [USER2] when the name is changed?
The display of [USER1] or [USER2] is also changed when the name is changed.
How do you adjust the brightness of the white part of the image?
- Press as to select [WHITE GAIN].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [WHITE GAIN] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
What is the adjustment range for white gain?
0 – +10
How do you make the brightness of the white part stronger?
Press w.
How do you make the image more natural?
Press q.
How do you switch gamma mode?
- Press as to select [GAMMA].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available gamma modes?
- [DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
- [USER] Uses the gamma data registered by the user. (Registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
- [1.8] Set so that images become as you like.
- [2.0]
- [2.2]
What is the gamma mode when edge blending adjustment is performed while [DEFAULT] is selected?
When the edge blending adjustment is performed while [DEFAULT] is selected, it will be the same gamma mode as when [2.2] is selected. (Only for PT-RW930, PT-RX110)
How do you change the [USER] name for gamma?
- Press as to select [GAMMA].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [USER].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
- Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. The gamma selection name is changed.
What happens to the display of [USER] when the name is changed?
Display of [USER] is also changed when the name is changed.
How do you correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light?
- Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available system daylight view options?
- [OFF] No correction.
-
- Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
How do you adjust the sharpness of the projected image?
- Press as to select [SHARPNESS].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust the level.
What is the adjustment range for sharpness?
0 – +15
What happens if you press w while the sharpness adjustment value is [+15]?
If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become .
What happens if you press q while the sharpness adjustment value is ?
If you press q while the adjustment value is , the value will become [+15].
How do you reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal?
- Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available noise reduction options?
- [OFF] No correction.
- Slightly corrects the noise.
- Moderately corrects the noise.
- Strongly corrects the noise.
When should you set noise reduction to [OFF]?
When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from the original image. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
How does dynamic contrast work?
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image to make the contrast optimum for the image.
How do you adjust dynamic contrast?
- Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available dynamic contrast options?
- [OFF] Disables the dynamic contrast function.
- Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
- Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
- Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
- [USER] Set any desired correction.
How do you perform the desired dynamic contrast correction?
- Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [USER].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select the item to set. The items in the detailed setting will switch each time you press qw. Press the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.
What are the dynamic contrast setting items?
| Setting item | Details |
|---|---|
| [AUTO CONTRAST] (Automatic light source adjustment) | [OFF] Does not adjust the light source. <br> – The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light source. Can be set in increments of 1. |
| [BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL] (Setting of the brightness level of the signal to start the light adjustment) | [6%] – [50%] Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the video signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the light source. Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 30 %) |
| [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] (Time setting until the light turns off) | [DISABLE] Does not turn off the light source. <br> [0.0s] – [10.0s] Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the video signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]. Select an item from [0.0s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.0s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5. |
| [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] (Setting of the brightness level of the signal to turn off the light) | [0%] – [5%] Sets the level of the brightness of the video signal to turn off the light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER]. Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %) |
| [MANUAL INTENSITY] (Manual light source adjustment) | – The larger the value, the stronger the correction. Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255) |
| [DYNAMIC GAMMA] (Adjustment of signal compensation) | [OFF] Does not compensate the signal. <br> Slightly compensates the signal. <br> Moderately compensates the signal. <br> Strongly compensates the signal. |
| [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] | Sets the contrast synchronization function. This setting item is common with the following menu item. <br> The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] <br>Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for details. |
When can you not set [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]?
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
What are the conditions to turn the light source back on again from the state that the light source has turned off by the [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] function when it is set to anything other than [DISABLE]?
- When the brightness level of the video signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
- When the input signal is gone
- When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
- When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
How might the image be affected when the image of analog signal is projected?
When the image of analog signal is projected, the image may be affected by the signal noise while the brightness level of the video signal is detected. In such case, it is determined that the signal has not fallen below even when the brightness level of the image falls below the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL].
When will the contrast be maximized?
The contrast will be maximized when [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set to.
How do the brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function operate?
The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
What is the contrast synchronization function?
The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of the video signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.
How do you set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input?
- Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select a system format. Select the system format with asqw when a signal is input connected to the <SDI IN> terminal. (Only for PT-RZ970) Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What are the available system formats for each terminal?
| Terminal | System format |
|---|---|
| <R/PR/VIDEO> terminal, <G/ Y>/<B/PB/C> terminal | Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60]. Select [AUTO] normally. ([AUTO] will automatically determine from [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].) Switch the setting to the appropriate TV signal format. |
| <RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2 IN> terminal <br> 480/60i, 576/50i, or 576/50p signal <br> 640 x 480/60 or 480/60p signal <br> Other moving image signals | Select [RGB] or [YCBCR]. <br> Select an item from [640×480/60], [480/60p YCBCR], or [480/60p RGB]. <br> Select [RGB] or [YPBPR]. |
| <DVI-D IN> terminal <br> 480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, or 576/50p signal <br> Other moving image signals | Select [RGB] or [YCBCR]. <br> Select [RGB] or [YPBPR]. |
| <HDMI IN> terminal, <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal <br> 480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, or 576/50p signal <br> Other moving image signals | Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YCBCR]. <br> Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR]. |
| <SDI IN> terminal (Only for PT-RZ970) | Select an item from [AUTO], [480/60i YCBCR], [576/50i YCBCR], [720/50p YPBPR], [720/60p YPBPR], [1080/24p YPBPR], [1080/24sF YPBPR], [1080/25p YPBPR], [1080/30p YPBPR], [1080/50i YPBPR], [1080/60i YPBPR], [1080/50p YPBPR], [1080/60p YPBPR], [1080/24p RGB], [1080/24sF RGB], [1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], [1080/60i RGB], [2K/24p RGB], [2K/25p RGB], [2K/30p RGB], [2K/48p YPBPR], [2K/50p YPBPR], or [2K/60p YPBPR]. |
What should you do for details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector?
Refer to “List of compatible signals”.
How might [SYSTEM SELECTOR] function for some connected external devices?
This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
What is sRGB?
sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966-2-1) for color reproduction defined by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission).
How do you reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors?
- Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF]. Refer to [COLOR MATCHING].
- Display the [PICTURE] menu.
- Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
- Press qw to set [NATURAL].
- Press as to select [COLOR].
- Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.
- Follow Steps 5) ‑ 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [WHITE GAIN], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] to the factory default settings.
What signals are available for sRGB?
sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.
When adjusting the shift, aspect, and clock phase when the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/ LAN> terminal what should you do first?
Adjust the shift, aspect, and clock phase from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device at first.
How do you move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even when the positions of the projector and screen are correct?
- Press as to select [SHIFT].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to adjust the position.
How do you adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the image?
| Orientation | Operation | Adjustment |
|---|---|---|
| Vertical (up and down) adjustment | Press a. <br> Press s. | The image position moves up. <br> The image position moves down. |
| Horizontal (right and left) adjustment | Press w. <br> Press q. | The image position moves to the right. <br> The image position moves to the left. |
What happens to the image position for portrait setting?
For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.
How do you switch the aspect ratio of the image?
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first.
- Press as to select [ASPECT].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the available aspect ratio options?
- [DEFAULT] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
- [VID AUTO]*1 Identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signal, and automatically switches the image size between 4:3 and 16:9. This is enabled when NTSC signal is input.
- [AUTO]*2 The projector identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480/60i and 480/60p signals.
- [THROUGH] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
- [16:9] Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input3. When wide-screen signals are input4, the images are displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
- [4:3] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input3. When wide-screen signals are input4, the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen.
- [H FIT] Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.
- [V FIT] Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.
- [HV FIT] Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
What signals are available for each aspect ratio type?
*1 During video signals and Y/C signal (NTSC) input only *2 During RGB signal (480/60i, 480/60p) input only *3 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4. *4 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
When are some size modes not available for certain types of input signals?
[DEFAULT] cannot be selected for video signal, Y/C signal (NTSC), or analog RGB signal (480/60i, 480/60p).
What happens if an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected?
If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals. Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
What should you note if using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation?
If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment and zoom function.
What happens when conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen?
If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the creator of the images.
How do you adjust the image size?
The adjustments in [ZOOM] will differ depending on the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].
How do you adjust the zoom when [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]?
- Press as to select [ZOOM].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL]. If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
- Press qw to adjust.
What are the [INTERLOCKED] options for zoom?
- [OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
- [ON] Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.
When can you not adjust [ZOOM]?
When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
How do I adjust the zoom on the projector?
-
Press as to select [ZOOM].
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
-
Press as to select [MODE].
-
Press qw to switch the item.
- [INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
- [FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
-
Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
-
Press qw to switch the item.
- [OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
- [ON] Uses [BOTH] to set the zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.
-
Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL]. If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
-
Press qw to adjust.
How can I adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines?
- Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].
- Press qw or the <ENTER> button. The [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press qw to adjust. Adjustment value will change between and [+31]. Adjust the image so that the amount of interference is at a minimum.
When can CLOCK PHASE be adjusted?
[CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when YCBCR/YPBPR signal or RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
When can CLOCK PHASE not be adjusted?
[CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.
How do I correct various types of distortion in a projected image?
-
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
-
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Does not perform geometric adjustment.
- [KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
- [CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
- [CURVED CORRECTION] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
- [PC-1]*1 Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.
- [PC-2]*1
- [PC-3]*1
*1 Only for PT-RZ970. Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control geometric adjustment. Consult your dealer. Up to three geometric adjustments performed using the computer can be saved.
How do I set the Keystone or Curved Correction?
- Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
- Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select the item to adjust.
- Press qw to adjust.
What are the options for Keystone?
- [LENS THROW RATIO] Set the throw ratio. Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by the projected image width here.
- [VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
- [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
- [VERTICAL BALANCE] Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical direction.
- [HORIZONTAL BALANCE] Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal direction.
What are the options for Curved Correction?
- [LENS THROW RATIO] Set the throw ratio. Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
- [VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
- [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
- [VERTICAL ARC]
- [HORIZONTAL ARC]
- [VERTICAL BALANCE]
- [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
- [MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO] Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
How do I set the Corner Correction?
- Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
- Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press asqw to adjust.
What are the options for Corner Correction?
- [UPPER LEFT]
- [UPPER RIGHT]
- [LOWER LEFT]
- [LOWER RIGHT]
- [LINEARITY] Horizontal direction Vertical direction
What should I be aware of when setting the Geometry?
- The menu or logo may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.
- The edge blending adjustment may not be performed correctly depending on the environment when using the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [EDGE BLENDING] and [GEOMETRY] simultaneously.
- The optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) can be used to expand the correctable range. To purchase the product, consult your dealer. (Only for PT-RZ970)
- The [GEOMETRY] setting becomes disabled when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to anything other than [OFF] while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110, disallowing the usage of the geometric adjustment function.
- The settings for [DEFAULT] and [USER] in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] become disabled when [GEOMETRY] is set to anything other than [OFF] while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110. The gamma mode will be the same as when set to [2.2].
- The image may disappear momentarily during adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
How do I enhance picture quality by raising the vertical resolution when a 576/50i signal for PAL (or SECAM), or 480/60i, 1080/50i, or 1080/60i signal for NTSC is input?
-
On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub‑ menu. Refer to “Navigating through the menu” for the operation of the menu screen.
-
Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].
-
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [AUTO] Automatically detects the signal and performs the cinema processing. (Factory default setting)
- [OFF] Does not perform cinema processing.
- [30p FIXED] When 480/60i or 1080/60i signal is input Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
- [25p FIXED] When 576/50i or 1080/50i signal is input
What should I be aware of when using Digital Cinema Reality?
- In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
- When the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
How can I adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected?
- Press as to select [BLANKING].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT]. The blanking width can be adjusted to arbitrary shape using a computer when [CUSTOM MASKING] is set to anything other than [OFF] ([PC-1], [PC-2], or [PC-3]). Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the computer can be saved. (Only for PT-RZ970) To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
- Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
How do I adjust the top of the screen?
Press q. The blanking zone moves upward. Press w. The blanking zone moves downward. Adjustment range:
- PT-RZ970: Top and bottom 0 – 599
- PT-RW930: Top and bottom 0 – 399
- PT-RX110: Top and bottom 0 – 383
How do I adjust the bottom of the screen?
Press w. The blanking zone moves upward. Press q. The blanking zone moves downward.
How do I adjust the left side of the screen?
Press w. The blanking zone moves to the right. Press q. The blanking zone moves to the left. Adjustment range:
- PT-RZ970: Left and right 0 – 959
- PT-RW930: Left and right 0 – 639
- PT-RX110: Left and right 0 – 511
How do I adjust the right side of the screen?
Press q. The blanking zone moves to the right. Press w. The blanking zone moves to the left.
How can I adjust the image to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines?
- Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press qw to adjust each item. Values corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point while viewing the screen if there are vertical stripes or sections are missing from the screen.
What should I be aware of when adjusting Input Resolution?
- Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.
- Image may be disrupted during automatic adjustment, but this is not a malfunction.
- [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when an RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
- Adjustment may not be possible depending on the signal.
How can I adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green?
- Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].
- Press qw to adjust.
What is the rough guide for the optimal value when the black part is blunt?
The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is the optimal value. (Range of adjustment: 1 – 255)
What is the rough guide for the optimal value when the black part is green?
The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness has improved is the optimal value.
When can CLAMP POSITION be adjusted?
[CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
When may CLAMP POSITION adjustment not be possible?
Adjustment may not be possible depending on the signal.
How do I use the edge blending function to seamlessly overlap multiple images?
-
Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
-
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Sets the edge blending function to off.
- [ON] Use the setting value preset in the projector for the inclination of the edge blending area.
- [USER] Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Configuration/registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
-
Proceed to Step 3) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
-
Press as to specify the location to be corrected.
- When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON]
- When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON]
- When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON]
- When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]
-
Press qw to switch to [ON].
-
Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].
-
Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.
-
Press as to select [MARKER].
-
Press qw to switch to [ON]. A marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different correction widths.
-
Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST].
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen is displayed. By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen, the black test pattern is displayed when you enter the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
-
Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed. [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
-
Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting. Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
-
Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in [BLACK BORDER WIDTH].
-
Press qw to set the region (width) of the [BLACK BORDER WIDTH] adjustment.
-
Press as to select [UPPER KEYSTONE AREA], [LOWER KEYSTONE AREA], [LEFT KEYSTONE AREA], or [RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA].
-
Press qw to adjust the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].
-
Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] screen is displayed. [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
-
Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting. Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
-
Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] for [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed. [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
-
Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
What should I be aware of when using edge blending?
- [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in the black level of the overlapping image area difficult to notice when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to structure a multi-display screen. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL], adjust the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker.
- The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.
- When structuring a multi-display screen using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] first before making adjustments in Step 12). Adjustment method is the same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
- If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.
- The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] → [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
- Adjustment of the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to perform edge blending together with the adjustment of [GEOMETRY]. Perform the edge blending adjustment matching the shape in [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] following Steps 17) and 18) when [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is tilted due to correcting the keystone with the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] → [KEYSTONE].
- The settings for [DEFAULT] and [USER] in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] become disabled when [EDGE BLENDING] is set to anything other than [OFF] while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110. The gamma mode will be the same as when set to [2.2].
How do I set image frame delay?
-
Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].
-
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [NORMAL] Standard setting.
- [FAST]*1 Simplifies the image processing to reduce image frame delay.
- [FIXED]*2 Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification.
*1 [FAST] cannot be set when the input signal is not an interlaced signal.
*2 Only when a moving image signal or still image signal with a vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is input.
What should I be aware of when setting Frame Response?
- When [FAST] is set, the picture quality deteriorates. The [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.
- [FRAME RESPONSE] cannot be set while in the P IN P mode.
How do I move the position of the image within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not using the whole display area?
- Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to adjust the position.
How do I change the display language on the projector?
- On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub‑menu. Refer to “Navigating through the menu” for the operation of the menu screen.
- Press as to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button. Various menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected language.
What languages can I choose from for the display language?
The language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese, Russian, or Korean.
What is the default language of the on-screen display?
The on-screen display language is set to English in the factory default setting as well as when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
How do I correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously?
-
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub‑ menu. Refer to “Navigating through the menu” for the operation of the menu screen.
-
Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
-
Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Color matching adjustment is not carried out.
- [3COLORS] Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
- [7COLORS] Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
- [MEASURED] Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” for details about this mode.
-
Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button. The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
-
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], or [WHITE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] when [7COLORS] is selected).
-
Press the <ENTER> button. The [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], [3COLORS:BLUE], or [3COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed. When [7COLORS] is selected, the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE], [7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA], [7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed. By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
-
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE]. Only [GAIN] can be adjusted when [WHITE] is selected for [3COLORS].
-
Press qw to adjust. The adjustment value will change between 0*1 and 2 048.
*1 The lower limit varies depending on the color to be adjusted.
What should I be aware of when adjusting the Color Matching?
- Operation when correcting the adjustment color:
- When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
- When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
- When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
- When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
- Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector or by a service person.
- Pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control will restore the factory default settings for all items.
- When this item is set to anything other than [OFF], the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR CORRECTION] is fixed to [OFF], and the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].
How do I adjust the color matching using a colorimeter?
Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.
- Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
- Press qw to select [MEASURED].
How do I adjust the color matching using a colorimeter?
Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.
- Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
- Press qw to select [MEASURED].
How do you measure luminance and chromaticity coordinates?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [MEASURED DATA].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.
- Press ▲▼ to select a color, and press ◄► to adjust the setting.
- Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
How do you display a test pattern of selected colors?
Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON].
How do you input coordinates for desired colors?
- Press ▲▼ to select [TARGET DATA].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select a color and press ◄► to input coordinates for desired colors.
When are colors not displayed properly?
Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.
How do you automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors?
Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON].
When using a colorimeter or similar instrument to take measurement, what colors should you measure?
Measure the colors displayed in [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
What is the standard setting for [COLOR CORRECTION]?
[OFF]
What are the signal formats for [COLOR CORRECTION] when set to [USER]?
- VIDEO
- Y/C
- RGB
- YCBCR/YPBPR
What colors can be adjusted and registered when [COLOR CORRECTION] is set to [USER]?
- Red
- Green
- Blue
- Cyan
- Magenta
- Yellow
What is the range of adjustment for [COLOR CORRECTION] when set to [USER]?
-31 to +31
How do you correct the optimum image position when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed?
- Press ▲▼ to select [SCREEN SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
What is the range of adjustment for the horizontal position when the [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to 4:3 on a PT-RZ970 projector?
Between -160 and 160.
What is the range of adjustment for the vertical position when the [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to 16:9 on a PT-RZ970 projector?
Between -60 and 60.
What is the range of adjustment for the vertical position when the [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to 16:9 on a PT-RW930 projector?
Between -40 and 40.
What is the range of adjustment for the vertical position when the [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to 16:9 on a PT-RX110 projector?
Between -96 and 96.
When can’t you adjust or select [SCREEN POSITION]?
When [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to the following:
- PT-RZ970, PT-RW930: [16:10]
- PT-RX110: [4:3]
How do you adjust the [SCREEN POSITION]?
Press ◄►.
What does the [AUTO SIGNAL] setting do?
It sets whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically. The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP> button on the remote control each time you input unregistered signals.
What does setting [AUTO SIGNAL] to [OFF] do?
Sets the auto signal function to off.
What does setting [AUTO SIGNAL] to [ON] do?
Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during projection.
When do you set [AUTO SETUP]?
When adjusting a special signal or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.
How do you set [AUTO SETUP] with [MODE]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What is the standard setting for [MODE]?
[DEFAULT]
When do you select the [WIDE] item for [MODE]?
When an image aspect ratio is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the [DEFAULT] setting.
When do you select the [USER] item for [MODE]?
When receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution.
How do you match [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal resolution of the signal source?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press ◄►.
- Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
When can automatic setup of a signal be executed?
When an analog RGB signal consisting of dots such as computer signal, or DVI-D/HDMI signal is being input.
How do you adjust position automatically?
- Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [POSITION ADJUST].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does setting [POSITION ADJUST] to [ON] do?
Adjusts the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.
What does setting [POSITION ADJUST] to [OFF] do?
It does not perform automatic adjustment.
How do you adjust the signal level automatically?
- Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does setting [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] to [OFF] do?
Does not perform automatic adjustment.
What does setting [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] to [ON] do?
Adjusts black level (the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (the [PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST]) when automatic setup is executed.
When may [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] not function properly?
Unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.
What does [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] do?
Sets the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input signal is disrupted.
How do you set [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does setting [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to [OFF] do?
Disables the backup function.
What does setting [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to [ON] do?
Enables the backup function between the DVI-D input and the HDMI input. The input is switched as seamless as possible when the same signal is input to the primary and secondary inputs. The primary input is fixed to the <DVI-D IN> terminal, and the secondary input is fixed to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
When can you not select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING]?
When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF].
How do you switch the [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] item?
Press ◄►.
What does setting [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] to [ENABLE] do?
Switches to the secondary input automatically when the input signal for primary input is disrupted.
What does setting [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] to [DISABLE] do?
Disables the automatic input switching function.
When is the backup function enabled?
Only when the [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [ON], and the same signal is input to the <DVI-D IN> and <HDMI IN> terminals.
What conditions must be satisfied to use the backup function?
- Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to [ON].
- Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.
- Display the image of the primary input.
What happens if the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use?
The state of readiness to use the backup function is canceled.
How do you switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again?
Switch to the primary input.
Where is [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] displayed?
- Input guide
- [STATUS] screen
What is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] when switching to the backup input signal is possible using the backup function?
[ACTIVE]
What is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] when switching to the backup input signal is not possible using the backup function?
[INACTIVE]
What input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary input is displayed?
The secondary input.
What input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary input is displayed?
The primary input.
When is the input switched seamlessly?
When the DVI-D and HDMI inputs are switched while [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [ON] and switching to the backup input signal is possible.
What happens when [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is [ACTIVE]?
The signal is switched to the backup input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.
What happens when [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE] and the signal is automatically switched to the backup input due to disruption of the input signal?
[BACKUP INPUT STATUS] changes to [INACTIVE].
When switching to the backup input signal is not possible?
Until the original input signal is restored.
When does switching to the backup input signal become possible again?
When the original input signal is restored.
What input is retained if the signal is automatically switched to the backup input, and the original signal is restored?
The current input.
Can you set [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] during P IN P?
No.
Is the backup operation performed during P IN P?
No.
How do you set the <RGB 1 IN> terminal and the <RGB 2 IN> terminal?
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB1 INPUT SETTING].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
When do you select [RGB/YPBPR]?
When an RGB signal or YCBCR/YPBPR signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
When do you select [VIDEO]?
When a video signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal (<R/PR/VIDEO>).
When do you select [Y/C]?
When a luminance signal and color signal are input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal (<G/ Y>, <B/PB/C>).
How do you switch the slice level of an input synchronization signal?
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does setting [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] to [LOW] do?
Sets the slice level to [LOW].
What does setting [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] to [HIGH] do?
Sets the slice level to [HIGH].
How do you set [RGB2 EDID MODE]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [RGB2 EDID MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to switch [EDID MODE].
What is the standard setting for [EDID MODE]?
[DEFAULT]
What does setting [EDID MODE] to [SCREEN FIT] do?
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
What does setting [EDID MODE] to [USER] do?
Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
How do you select the [RESOLUTION]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼◄► to select [RESOLUTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What are the available [RESOLUTION] selections?
- 1024x768p
- 1280x720p
- 1280x768p
- 1280x800p
- 1280x1024p
- 1366x768p
- 1400x1050p
- 1440x900p
- 1600x900p
- 1600x1200p
- 1680x1050p
- 1920x1080p
- 1920x1080i
- 1920x1200p
How do you select the [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
Press ◄►.
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080p is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 30Hz
- 25Hz
- 24Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080i is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 48Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when a resolution other than 1920x1080p or 1920x1080i is selected?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
How do you confirm the selection for [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Where are the settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] displayed?
In the [RGB IN] screen.
May setting the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency be necessary on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
May the computer, video device, or projector in use require the power to be turned off and on again after setting?
Yes.
May the output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
How do you set [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DVI-D IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DVI-D IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [AUTO] for [SIGNAL LEVEL] do?
Automatically sets the signal level.
When do you select [0-255:PC] for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When the signal output from the DVI-D terminal of the external device (such as a computer) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Blu-ray disc player) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.
What does the optimal [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting vary depending on?
The output setting of the connected external device.
How do you set [EDID SELECT] in [DVI-D IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DVI-D IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [EDID SELECT].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [EDID3] do?
Determines the moving image or still image signal automatically.
When do you select [EDID1]?
Mainly when an external device that will output the moving image signal (such as a Blu-ray disc player) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
When do you select [EDID2:PC]?
Mainly when an external device that will output the still image signal (such as a computer) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
What will change when the setting for [EDID SELECT] is changed?
The data for plug and play.
How do you set [EDID MODE] in [DVI-D IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DVI-D IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [EDID MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What is the standard setting for [EDID MODE]?
[DEFAULT]
What does selecting [SCREEN FIT] for [EDID MODE] do?
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
What does selecting [USER] for [EDID MODE] do?
Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
How do you select the [RESOLUTION]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼◄► to select [RESOLUTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What are the available [RESOLUTION] selections?
- 1024x768p
- 1280x720p
- 1280x768p
- 1280x800p
- 1280x1024p
- 1366x768p
- 1400x1050p
- 1440x900p
- 1600x900p
- 1600x1200p
- 1680x1050p
- 1920x1080p
- 1920x1080i
- 1920x1200p
How do you select the [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
Press ◄►.
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080p is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 30Hz
- 25Hz
- 24Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080i is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 48Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when a resolution other than 1920x1080p or 1920x1080i is selected?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
How do you confirm the selection for [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Where are the settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] displayed?
In the [DVI-D IN] screen.
May setting the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency be necessary on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
May the computer, video device, or projector in use require the power to be turned off and on again after setting?
Yes.
May the output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
How do you set [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [HDMI IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [HDMI IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [AUTO] for [SIGNAL LEVEL] do?
Automatically sets the signal level.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a Blu-ray disc player) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
- When the signal output from the DVI-D terminal of an external device (such as a computer) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable.
- When the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer or other device is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
What does the optimal [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting vary depending on?
The output setting of the connected external device.
For how many bits of input is the HDMI signal level displayed?
30
How do you set [EDID MODE] in [HDMI IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [HDMI IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [EDID MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What is the standard setting for [EDID MODE]?
[DEFAULT]
What does selecting [SCREEN FIT] for [EDID MODE] do?
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
What does selecting [USER] for [EDID MODE] do?
Set the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
How do you select the [RESOLUTION]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼◄► to select [RESOLUTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What are the available [RESOLUTION] selections?
- 1024x768p
- 1280x720p
- 1280x768p
- 1280x800p
- 1280x1024p
- 1366x768p
- 1400x1050p
- 1440x900p
- 1600x900p
- 1600x1200p
- 1680x1050p
- 1920x1080p
- 1920x1080i
- 1920x1200p
How do you select the [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
Press ◄►.
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080p is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 30Hz
- 25Hz
- 24Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080i is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 48Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when a resolution other than 1920x1080p or 1920x1080i is selected?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
How do you confirm the selection for [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Where are the settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] displayed?
In the [HDMI IN] screen.
May setting the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency be necessary on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
May the computer, video device, or projector in use require the power to be turned off and on again after setting?
Yes.
May the output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
How do you set [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [AUTO] for [SIGNAL LEVEL] do?
Automatically sets the signal level.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When the signal output from the DVI-D terminal or HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
What does the optimal [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting vary depending on?
The output setting of the connected external device.
For how many bits of input is the signal level displayed?
30
How do you set [EDID MODE] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [EDID MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What is the standard setting for [EDID MODE]?
[DEFAULT]
What does selecting [SCREEN FIT] for [EDID MODE] do?
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
What does selecting [USER] for [EDID MODE] do?
Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
How do you select the [RESOLUTION]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼◄► to select [RESOLUTION].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What are the available [RESOLUTION] selections?
- 1024x768p
- 1280x720p
- 1280x768p
- 1280x800p
- 1280x1024p
- 1366x768p
- 1400x1050p
- 1440x900p
- 1600x900p
- 1600x1200p
- 1680x1050p
- 1920x1080p
- 1920x1080i
- 1920x1200p
How do you select the [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
Press ◄►.
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080p is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 30Hz
- 25Hz
- 24Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when 1920x1080i is selected for [RESOLUTION]?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
- 48Hz
What [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] can you select when a resolution other than 1920x1080p or 1920x1080i is selected?
- 60Hz
- 50Hz
How do you confirm the selection for [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY]?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Where are the settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] displayed?
In the [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen.
May setting the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency be necessary on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
May the computer, video device, or projector in use require the power to be turned off and on again after setting?
Yes.
May the output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use?
Yes.
How do you select the amplitude of the signal to input in [SDI IN]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [SDI IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
When do you normally use the setting for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
Normally.
When do you select for [SIGNAL LEVEL]?
When gray is displayed as black.
How do you set [BIT DEPTH]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [SDI IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [BIT DEPTH].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [AUTO] for [BIT DEPTH] do?
Automatically selects [12-bit] or [10-bit].
What does selecting [12-bit] for [BIT DEPTH] do?
Fixes to [12-bit].
What does selecting [10-bit] for [BIT DEPTH] do?
Fixes to [10-bit].
How do you set [3G-SDI MAPPING]?
- Press ▲▼ to select [SDI IN].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting [AUTO] for [3G-SDI MAPPING] do?
Automatically selects [LEVEL A] or [LEVEL B].
What does selecting [LEVEL A] for [3G-SDI MAPPING] do?
Fixes to [LEVEL A].
What does selecting [LEVEL B] for [3G-SDI MAPPING] do?
Fixes to [LEVEL B].
When does the [3G-SDI MAPPING] item not operate?
During SD-SDI or HD-SDI signal input.
How do you set the position of the menu screen (OSD)?
- Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press ▲▼ to select [OSD POSITION].
- Press ◄► to switch the item.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the center left of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the top center of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the center of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the upper right of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the center right of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
What does selecting for [OSD POSITION] do?
Sets to the upper left of the screen.
How do you set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD)?
- Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
How do I rotate the on-screen display?
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Does not rotate the screen.
- [CLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
- [COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.
How do I set the OSD design?
Set the color of the menu screen (OSD) using the following steps:
- Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [OSD DESIGN].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- ** Sets to yellow.**
- ** Sets to blue.**
- ** Sets to white.**
- ** Sets to green.**
- ** Sets to peach.**
- ** Sets to brown.**
How do I set the OSD memory?
Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor using the following steps:
- Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [ON] Holds the cursor position.
- [OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.
Even if [ON] is set, the cursor position is not maintained when the power is turned off.
How do I set the input guide?
Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION] using these steps. The input guide is the screen to display the information such as currently selected input terminal name, signal name, memory number, the input terminal and signal structuring [P IN P], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].
- Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [ON] Displays the input guide.
- [OFF] Hides the input guide.
How do I set the warning message?
Set the display/hide of the warning message using these instructions:
- Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [ON] Displays the warning message.
- [OFF] Hides the warning message.
If [OFF] is set, the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even when warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE WARNING] is detected while using the projector. Also, the following countdown message is not displayed: the message until the power is turned off after the no signal lights-out function is executed; the message until the light source is turned off after the no signal lights-out function is executed
How do I select the closed caption display?
- Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Hides closed captions.
- [ON] Displays closed captions.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
How do I set the closed caption mode?
- Press as to select [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [MODE].
- [MODE] cannot be selected when [CLOSED CAPTION] is set to [OFF].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [CC1] Displays CC1 data.
- [CC2] Displays CC2 data.
- [CC3] Displays CC3 data.
- [CC4] Displays CC4 data.
Closed caption is a function that displays text information of video signals mainly used in North America. Captions may not be displayed depending on the connected devices or contents being played back.
What are some things to note about closed caption settings?
- [CLOSED CAPTION SETTING] can be selected only when NTSC or 480/60i YCBCR signal is input.
- If [CLOSED CAPTION] is set to [ON], brightness of images may change depending on the external devices compatible with closed caption function to be connected or contents to be used.
- If a closed caption signal of the selected mode is input, the security message set in the [SECURITY] menu → [DISPLAY SETTING] is not displayed.
- Closed captions are not displayed when the menu screen is displayed.
How do I rotate the input image when projecting?
- Press as to select [IMAGE ROTATION].
- Press qw to select an item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Projects the input image without rotating.
- [CLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° clockwise and project it.
- [COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° counterclockwise and project it.
What are some things to note about rotating the input image?
- [IMAGE ROTATION] is disabled during P IN P.
- The on-screen display direction does not change even when this item is set to anything other than [OFF]. Set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD ROTATION] as required.
- The [GEOMETRY] setting becomes disabled when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to anything other than [OFF] while using PT-RW930 or PT-RX110, disallowing the usage of the geometric adjustment function.
How do I set the back color?
This setting changes what is displayed when there is no signal input.
- Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.
- [BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
- [DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
- [USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
How do I set the startup logo?
- Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
- [USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
- [NONE] Disables the startup logo display.
What are some things to note about the startup logo settings?
- When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.
- To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
- When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the startup logo is not displayed when the projection is started before the specified time has elapsed after going into the standby mode. The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
How do I correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen?
- Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
- Press qw to adjust the level.
How do I adjust the vertical and horizontal color?
| Item | Operation | Adjustment Range of adjustment |
|---|---|---|
| VERTICAL | Press w. The lower-side color becomes pale, or the upper-side color becomes dark. | -127 – +127 |
| Press q. The upper-side color becomes pale, or the lower-side color becomes dark. | ||
| HORIZONTAL | Press w. The left-side color becomes pale, or the right-side color becomes dark. | -127 – +127 |
| Press q. The right-side color becomes pale, or the left-side color becomes dark. |
How do I set the PC correction?
Only for PT-RZ970
Set the [PC CORRECTION] function to correct the brightness and the color unevenness of the entire screen using a computer. To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
- Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [PC CORRECTION].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- [OFF] Does not perform correction using a computer.
- *[ON]1 Performs correction for the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen using a computer.
*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use computer control correction. Consult your dealer.
The setting value for [UNIFORMITY] will not return to factory default even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
How do I set the fade-in or fade-out for the shutter?
Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates using the following steps:
- Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
- Press qw to switch the item.
| Item | Adjustment |
|---|---|
| FADE-IN | [OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out. |
| [0.5s] – [10.0s] Sets the fade-in or fade-out time. Select an item from [0.5s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5. | |
| FADE-OUT | [OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out. |
| [0.5s] – [10.0s] Sets the fade-in or fade-out time. Select an item from [0.5s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5. |
Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.
How do I set the startup shutter settings?
Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/open) when the power is turned on using these steps:
- Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [STARTUP].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- [OPEN] The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the power is turned on.
- [CLOSE] The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the power is turned on.
How do I set the shutter synchronization function?
The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade out/fade in operation can be synchronized. To use the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of how to connect the projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function”.
- Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [MODE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function are not used.
- [MASTER] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used. Set this item only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation within the linked projectors.
- [SLAVE] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used. Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MASTER].
- Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [OFF] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
- [ON] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.
When anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if [MODE] is correctly set.
- [LINKED] All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
- [NO LINK] The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.
What are some things to note about the shutter synchronization function?
- The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] setting item is common with the following menu item:
- The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
- For details on contrast synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
- The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
- All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)
- [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MASTER], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SLAVE].
- [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].
- It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
- The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] of the projector that [MODE] is set to [MASTER].
- When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to 1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.
- The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SLAVE] can be operated individually. At that time, the shutter operation will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.
How do I temporarily stop a projected image?
To stop the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device:
- Press as to select [FREEZE].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press the <MENU> button to release.
[FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
How do I use the waveform monitor?
Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output (luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust using these steps:
- Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- [OFF] Does not display the waveform monitor.
- [ON] Displays the waveform monitor.
- Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.
- Press as to select any horizontal line.
- Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.
- Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.
- “Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.
- “Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.
- “Select line (green)” Displayed in green waveform.
- “Select line (blue)” Displayed in blue waveform.
- Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.
What are some things to note about the waveform monitor?
- Setting is also available from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
- The waveform monitor cannot be displayed while in the P IN P mode.
- The waveform monitor turns off when the P IN P function is used while the waveform is being monitored.
- The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).
How do I adjust the waveform?
Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and adjust using the following steps:
- Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.
- Adjust black level.
- Adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor using the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS].
- Adjust white level.
- Adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor using the [PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST].
How do I adjust red, green, and blue?
- Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2].
- Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.
- Adjust dark red areas.
- Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.
- Adjust bright red areas.
- Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.
- Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].
Confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting of the input signal is correct before adjusting the black level. Confirm the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DVI-D IN]/[HDMI IN]/[DIGITAL LINK IN]/[SDI IN] → [SIGNAL LEVEL]. ([SDI IN] is supported only for PT-RZ970.)
How do I cut off red, green, and blue color components?
- Press as to select [CUT OFF].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- [OFF] Disables cutoff.
- [ON] Enables cutoff.
When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
How do I set the projector ID?
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
- Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [ALL] Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
- ** – Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.**
What are some things to note about setting the projector ID?
- To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
- When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer control. If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID numbers.
- Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
How do I set the projection method?
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector. Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted. Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.
How do I set the front/rear settings?
- Press as to select [FRONT/REAR] of [PROJECTION METHOD].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [FRONT] Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.
- [REAR] Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).
How do I set the floor/ceiling settings?
- Press as to select [FLOOR/CEILING] of [PROJECTION METHOD].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- [AUTO] Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor. Set [AUTO] normally.
- [FLOOR] Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
- [CEILING] Select this item when installing the projector using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional). Projected image is inverted upside down.
Refer to “Angle sensor” for details on the range of the installation attitude that can be detected by the built-in angle sensor.
How do I set the operation method?
Set the operation method of the projector. The settings are reflected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” in the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is already set. If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance of light source decreases by half may shorten or the luminance may decrease.
How do I set the operating mode?
- Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- The items will switch each time you press the button.
- Set [OPERATING MODE] to [NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] when using the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858’) or higher above sea level.
- *[NORMAL]1 Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours.
- *[ECO]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours.
- *[QUIET1]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low noise is prioritized. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours.
- *[QUIET2]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [QUIET1], but select this item when operating the projector with less noise. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours.
- *[LONG LIFE1]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [ECO], butset this item to increase the expected life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 43 000 hours.
- *[LONG LIFE2]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [LONG LIFE1], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 61 000 hours.
- *[LONG LIFE3]1 The luminance will decrease compared to [LONG LIFE2], but set this item to increase the expected life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 87 000 hours.
- [USER1] [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually.
- [USER2] [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually.
- [USER3] [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be set individually.
- Press as to select [APPLY].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
*1 The runtime is an estimation when the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to.
What are some things to note about the operating mode?
- The [OPERATING MODE] setting does not return to factory default setting even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
- If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
How do I adjust the max light output level?
Adjust the maximum level to correct screen brightness according to the changes in brightness of the light source using the following steps:
- Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
- Press qw to adjust
How do I adjust the maximum level of brightness correction?
Press “w” to increase the maximum level of brightness correction. Press “q” to decrease it. The adjustment range is 8.0% to 100.0%. To apply the changes, select “[APPLY]” and press the “<ENTER>” button. When prompted for confirmation, select “[OK]” and press the “<ENTER>” button.
When can the “MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL” item be adjusted?
The “[MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]” item can be adjusted unless “[OPERATING MODE]” is set to “[NORMAL]”, “[ECO]”, “[QUIET1]”, “[QUIET2]”, “[LONG LIFE1]”, “[LONG LIFE2]”, or “[LONG LIFE3]”.
When is brightness corrected using the “MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL” setting?
Brightness is corrected using the “MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL” setting when “[PROJECTOR SETUP]” → “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]” → “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” → “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[AUTO]” or “[PC]”.
Does the “MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL” setting return to the factory default even if the “[PROJECTOR SETUP]” → “[INITIALIZE]” → “[ALL USER DATA]” is executed?
No.
How do I adjust the “LIGHT OUTPUT”?
- Press “as” to select “[OPERATION SETTING]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “as” to select “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”.
- Press “qw” to adjust the brightness. Pressing “w” makes the screen brighter and shortens runtime. Pressing “q” makes the screen darker and lengthens runtime.
- Press “as” to select “[APPLY]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press “qw” to select “[OK]”, and press the “<ENTER>” button.
Can “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” be adjusted individually for each “[OPERATING MODE]” setting?
Yes.
What is the benefit of being able to adjust “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” individually for each “[OPERATING MODE]” setting?
In cases where multiple screens are configured with multiple projectors, uniformity of brightness between multiple screens can be obtained by adjusting “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”.
How can the projector be operated at arbitrary brightness and duration of use?
The projector can be operated at arbitrary brightness and duration of use by combining the settings of “[MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]”, “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”, and “[CONSTANT MODE]” in “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]”. Make the settings depending on your desired duration of use and brightness of the projected image. Note that values of the luminance and runtime are rough estimations.
How do I set the operation of the brightness control function?
- Press “as” to select “[OPERATION SETTING]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “as” to select “[CONSTANT MODE]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available items are:
- “[OFF]” – Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
- “[AUTO]” – Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor. When the brightness of the light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is automatically corrected.
- “[PC]” – Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” included on the supplied CD-ROM.
If “[PC]” is selected, proceed to step 7.
- Press “as” to select “[LINK]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available items are:
- “[OFF]” – Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other projectors. The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” smaller.
- “[GROUP A]”
- “[GROUP B]”
- “[GROUP C]”
- “[GROUP D]” – Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization. Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function. Up to eight projectors can be registered and synchronized in one group.
- Press “as” to select “[CALIBRATION TIME]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button. The projector will go into the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
- Press “qw” to select “hour” or “minute”, and press “as” or the number (<0> – <9>) buttons to set a time. Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59. When the time is not specified, select “[OFF]” between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the minute.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button to set “[CALIBRATION TIME]”. Brightness and color are measured at the specified time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate during measurement.
- Press “as” to select “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button. The available options are “[ON]” (Displays message during calibration) and “[OFF]” (Does not display messages during calibration).
- Press “as” to select “[APPLY]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button. When “[CONSTANT MODE]” in “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” is set to anything other than “[OFF]”, the brightness and white balance of the light source at the time when the “<ENTER>” button is pressed is recorded as the standard brightness and white balance. If the “<ENTER>” button is pressed when “[LINK]” is set from “[GROUP A]” to “[GROUP D]”, the group name is displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press “qw” to select “[OK]”, and press the “<ENTER>” button.
What precautions should I take when operating the projector with “[CONSTANT MODE]” in “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” set to “[AUTO]” or “[PC]”?
- Keep the shutter function disabled (shutter: open) for at least two minutes, since the brightness sensor calibration is performed after the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” setting has been completed.
- If the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) within approximately 10 minutes after the light source has turned on, brightness and color cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness may be corrected approximately two minutes after the shutter function is disabled (shutter: open).
- The brightness and the color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after turning on the light source. The brightness and the color of the light source will be automatically measured approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based on this measurement result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and color when adjusted with the brightness control.
- The items of “[OPERATING MODE]” and “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” cannot be changed.
- When “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[AUTO]”, and “[LINK]” is set to “[OFF]”, the brightness will be corrected until it reaches the value set in “[MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]”.
- The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation environment of the projector.
- When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the brightness control.
- When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set the “[CALIBRATION TIME]” in “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]”. If it is not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
- The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
When are the “[CALIBRATION TIME]” and “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]” settings reflected?
The “[CALIBRATION TIME]” setting is reflected when you enter the time. The “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]” setting is reflected when items are switched using “qw”.
How do I adjust the “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”?
- Press “as” to select “[LIGHT OUTPUT]”.
- Press “qw” to adjust.
Pressing “w” makes the screen brighter and shortens runtime. Pressing “q” makes the screen darker and lengthens runtime. The adjustment range is 8.0% to 100.0%.
Can “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” be adjusted individually for each “[OPERATING MODE]” setting?
Yes. Doing so allows for uniformity of brightness between multiple screens when multiple projectors are used to configure multiple screens.
What is the function of the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]”?
The projector is equipped with a brightness sensor to measure brightness and color of the light source, and corrects brightness and white balance of the projected image according to the changes in brightness and color of the light source. By using this function, in such a condition that multiple screens are configured using multiple projectors, you can reduce changes in overall brightness and white balance of the multiple screens due to aging of the light source and suppress variation in brightness and white balance to preserve uniformity. The setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” in the “[INITIAL SETTING]” screen or with the “[PROJECTOR SETUP]” menu → “[OPERATION SETTING]”. The “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” setting is synchronized with the “[PROJECTOR SETUP]” menu → “[OPERATION SETTING]” → “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]”. The most recent setting is reflected in both items.
How do I set the operation of the brightness control function?
- Press “as” to select “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “as” to select “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “as” to select “[CONSTANT MODE]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available items are:
- “[OFF]” – Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
- “[AUTO]” – Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor. When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the projected image is automatically corrected.
- “[PC]” – Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” included on the supplied CD-ROM. If “[PC]” is selected, proceed to step 9.
- Press “as” to select “[LINK]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available items are:
- “[OFF]” – Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other projectors. The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” smaller.
- “[GROUP A]”
- “[GROUP B]”
- “[GROUP C]”
- “[GROUP D]” – Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization. Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function. Up to eight projectors can be registered and synchronized in one group.
- Press “as” to select “[CALIBRATION TIME]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button. The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
- Press “qw” to select “hour” or “minute”, and press “as” or the number (<0> – <9>) buttons to set a time. Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59. When the time is not specified, select “[OFF]” between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the minute.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button to set “[CALIBRATION TIME]”. Brightness and color are measured at the specified time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate during measurement.
- Press “as” to select “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button. The available options are “[ON]” (Displays messages during calibration) and “[OFF]” (Does not display messages during calibration).
- Press “as” to select “[APPLY]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button. If the “<ENTER>” button is pressed with “[CONSTANT MODE]” set to anything other than “[OFF]”, the brightness and white balance of light source at the time when the button is pressed is recorded as the standard brightness and white balance. If the “<ENTER>” button is pressed when “[LINK]” is set from “[GROUP A]” to “[GROUP D]”, the group name is displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
What precautions should I take when operating the projector with “[CONSTANT MODE]” set to “[AUTO]” or “[PC]”?
- Keep the shutter function disabled (shutter: open) for at least two minutes, since the brightness sensor calibration is performed after the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” setting has been completed.
- If the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) within approximately 10 minutes after the light source has been turned on while the projector operates with “[CONSTANT MODE]” set to “[AUTO]” or “[PC]”, brightness and color cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness may be corrected approximately two minutes after the shutter function is disabled (shutter: open).
- When the projector operates with “[CONSTANT MODE]” set to “[AUTO]” or “[PC]”, the brightness and color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. Therefore, the brightness and color of the light source will be automatically measured after approximately eight minutes have elapsed after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based on this measurement result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and color when adjusted with the brightness control.
- When the projector operates with “[CONSTANT MODE]” set to “[AUTO]”, and “[LINK]” set to “[OFF]”, the brightness will be corrected until it reaches the value set in “[MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]”.
- The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation environment of the projector.
- When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the brightness control.
- When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set “[CALIBRATION TIME]”. If it is not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
- The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
When are the “[CALIBRATION TIME]” and “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]” settings reflected?
The “[CALIBRATION TIME]” setting will be reflected when you enter the time. The “[CALIBRATION MESSAGE]” setting will be reflected at the time when the item is switched using “qw”.
How do I display the brightness control status?
- Press “as” to select “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “as” to select “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
What does the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen show when “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[OFF]”?
It shows that brightness control is disabled.
What does the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen show when “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[AUTO]” and “[LINK]” is set to “[OFF]”?
It shows the status of the brightness control in one projector.
What does the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen show when “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[AUTO]” and “[LINK]” is set to “[GROUP A]” through “[GROUP D]”?
It shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the projector being controlled through the on-screen menu.
What does the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen show when “[CONSTANT MODE]” is set to “[PC]”?
It shows the status of the brightness control.
What are the meanings of the colors used to display status in the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen?
- Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.
- Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.
- Red: There is a brightness control error.
What does it mean when the message “[Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.]” appears?
It means that synchronization with the projector displayed in red has failed.
What should I do if the message “[Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.]” appears?
Press “as” to select the projector displayed in red, and press the “<ENTER>” button to display the error details.
How do I update to the latest status information in the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” screen?
Press “as” to select “[UPDATE]” and then press the “<ENTER>” button.
What measures should I take if the “[Exceed maximum number of projectors.]” error message is displayed?
- Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.
- To synchronize nine or more projectors, use a PC and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” included on the supplied CD-ROM.
What measures should I take if the “[Please check the COMMAND CONTROL setting.]” error message is displayed?
- Set “[NETWORK CONTROL]” → “[COMMAND CONTROL]” to “[ON]” for the projector in error.
- Set “[NETWORK CONTROL]” → “[COMMAND PORT]” of all projectors to be linked to the same value.
What measures should I take if the “[Please check the USER NAME and PASSWORD in the COMMAND CONTROL setting.]” error message is displayed?
Assign the same “[User name]” and “[Password]” strings that have web control administrator rights to all projectors to be linked.
What measures should I take if the “[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL. Please check projector status.]” error message is displayed?
Switch on the projector as it is likely in standby.
What measures should I take if the “[Brightness Sensor Error]” error message is displayed?
There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the power, consult your dealer.
What should I check if the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]” list?
- Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?
- Are LAN cables connected correctly?
- Are the subnets of the projectors the same?
- Are the same “[LINK]” settings applied to a group?
How do I change the projector name?
Refer to “[NETWORK SETUP]” or the “[Network config]” page.
What are the steps involved in adjusting brightness control to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network?
- Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables.
- Switch on all projectors and start projection.
- Set “[CONSTANT MODE]” of “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” to “[OFF]”, select “[APPLY]”, and then press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Set “[OPERATING MODE]” of each projector to the same setting.
- Set “[SUBNET MASK]” and “[IP ADDRESS]” in each projector. To be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in “[SUBNET MASK]” for all projectors and set a different value in “[IP ADDRESS]” for each projector.
- Wait for at least eight minutes after projection has started until the light source brightness becomes steady.
- Set all items in the “[PICTURE]” menu of all projectors to the same values.
- Adjust “[COLOR MATCHING]” to match colors.
- Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.
- Set “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” of all projectors to 100 % or the maximum value that can be set. Depending on the “[OPERATING MODE]” settings, “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” may not be able to be set to 100 %.
- Set “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” of the projector with the least brightness to 90 % or 10 % lower than the maximum value that can be set.
- Adjust “[LIGHT OUTPUT]” of each projector so that the brightness will be the same as the projector with the least brightness.
- Set “[CONSTANT MODE]” of “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” to “[AUTO]”, and “[LINK]” to “[GROUP A]” in all projectors.
- Select “[APPLY]” of “[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]” and press the “<ENTER>” button in all projectors to start brightness control.
When is brightness automatically corrected?
Brightness is automatically corrected whenever the light source lights up by switching on/off the projector.
When should I readjust the brightness control?
When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when the light source is replaced.
How do I set the power consumption during standby?
- Press “as” to select “[STANDBY MODE]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available options are:
- “[NORMAL]” – Select this item when using the network function during standby.
- “[ECO]” – Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.
What are the implications of setting “[STANDBY MODE]” to “[ECO]”?
- The network function, the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands become inoperable during standby.
- It may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when “[NORMAL]” is set.
What are the implications of setting “[STANDBY MODE]” to “[NORMAL]”?
The network function and the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal can be used during standby.
Does the “[STANDBY MODE]” setting return to the factory default setting even if the “[PROJECTOR SETUP]” menu → “[INITIALIZE]” → “[ALL USER DATA]” is executed?
No.
How do I enable or disable the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function?
- Press “as” to select “[QUICK STARTUP]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available options are:
- “[OFF]” – Disables the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function.
- “[ON]” – Enables the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function until the specified time set in “[VALID PERIOD]” elapses after the projector enters the standby mode. The time until the projection starts after the power is turned on will be reduced during the period when the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is valid. If “[ON]” is selected, proceed to Step 3.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “qw” to switch “[VALID PERIOD]”. The items will switch each time you press the button. Available options are “[30MIN.]”, “[60MIN.]” and “[90MIN.]”. These options set the time until the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is disabled after the projector enters the standby mode.
When can’t “[QUICK STARTUP]” be set?
“[QUICK STARTUP]” cannot be set when “[STANDBY MODE]” is set to “[ECO]”.
What is the effect on power consumption when “[QUICK STARTUP]” is set to “[ON]”?
The power consumption during standby becomes high during the period when the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is valid.
What happens when the time set in “[VALID PERIOD]” elapses after the projector enters the standby mode with “[QUICK STARTUP]” set to “[ON]”?
The “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is disabled. The startup time and power consumption will be the same as when “[QUICK STARTUP]” is set to “[OFF]”.
What does the power indicator do when “[QUICK STARTUP]” is set to “[ON]”?
It blinks in red while in standby mode during the period when the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is valid. The power indicator lights up in red when the specified time set in “[VALID PERIOD]” elapses after the projector enters the standby mode.
How is the period when the “[QUICK STARTUP]” function is valid counted?
It is counted as projector runtime.
What is the “[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]” function?
It automatically sets the power of the projector to standby mode when there is no input signal for a specific period of time.
How do I set the time before switching to standby for the “[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]” function?
- Press “as” to select “[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available options are:
- “[DISABLE]” – Disables the no signal shut-off function.
- “[10MIN.]” – “[90MIN.]” – Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.
What is the “[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]” function?
It automatically turns off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for a specific period.
How do I set the time before the light source is turned off for the “[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]” function?
- Press “as” to select “[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available options are:
- “[DISABLE]” – Disables the no signal lights-out function.
- “[10SEC.]” – “[5MIN.]” – Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period. Select “[10SEC.]”, “[20SEC.]”, “[30SEC.]”, “[1MIN.]”, “[2MIN.]”, “[3MIN.]”, or “[5MIN.]”.
What does the power indicator do while the no signal lights-out function is operating and the light source is turned off?
It blinks slowly in green.
What are the conditions to turn the light source back on again when it has been turned off by the “[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]” function?
- When the signal has been input
- When the on-screen display such as the menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
- When the power on ** button is pressed
- When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: open) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button
- When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
How do I set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>?
- Press “as” to select “[INITIAL STARTUP]”.
- Press “qw” to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
The available options are:
- “[LAST MEMORY]” – Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
- “[STANDBY]” – Starts up the projector in standby.
- “[ON]” – Starts projecting immediately.
How do I set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection?
- Press “as” to select “[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]”.
- Press the “<ENTER>” button.
- Press “asqw” to select the input, and press the “<ENTER>” button.
How do you use the P IN P function?
Locate a separate, small sub screen in the main screen to project two images simultaneously.
- Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select a function. [OFF] P IN P function is not used. [USER1] [USER2] [USER3] The P IN P function is used with the setting set in “Setting P IN P function”.
- Press the <ENTER> button.
How do you set the P IN P function?
P IN P function settings can be saved to [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3].
- Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select the desired mode from [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select [MAIN WINDOW] or [SUB WINDOW], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select the input terminal to be displayed in the window, and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select an item. [SIZE] Sets the window display size between 10 % and 100 %. [POSITION] Sets the window display position within the screen. [CLOCK PHASE] Sets the value between 0 and +31 when the sub window receives a signal from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal and flickering image or smeared outline appears.
- If [SIZE] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button. f The sub-menu is displayed.
- Press as to select an item.
- Press qw to make adjustment, and press the <MENU> button.
- If [POSITION] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.
- Press asqw to adjust the position, and press the <MENU> button.
- If [CLOCK PHASE] is selected in Step 6), press qw to make adjustment.
- Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].
- Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button. [MAIN WINDOW] Sets the frame lock for the input signal set in the main window. [SUB WINDOW] Sets the frame lock for the input signal set in the sub window.
- Press as to select [TYPE].
- Press qw to switch the item. [MAIN WINDOW] The main window has display priority. [SUB WINDOW] The sub window has display priority.
While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), how do you switch the sizes and positions of the main window and sub window while P IN P is operating?
Press qw.
What are the reasons why the P IN P function may not be available?
- The P IN P function may not be available for some signals being input or terminals being selected.
- Images in combination of DIGITAL LINK and other inputs cannot be displayed in P IN P.
- [P IN P] cannot be set when the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to anything other than [NORMAL].
- [P IN P] cannot be set when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
- [P IN P] cannot be set when [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to anything other than [OFF].
How do you display the test pattern built-in to the projector?
On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
- Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item. f The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the test patterns you can switch to?
- Menu screen + All white- Displays a test pattern with the menu screen. Select a desired test pattern.
- Menu screen + All black
- Menu screen + Window
- Menu screen + Window (inversion)
- Menu screen + Color bar (vertical)
- Menu screen + Color bar (horizontal)
- Menu screen + 16:9/4:3 aspect frame
- Menu screen + Focus
- Menu screen + Input screen- Displays the menu screen and input signal. Internal test patterns are not displayed.
How do you hide the menu screen while the test pattern is displayed?
Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control.
How do you change the color of the test pattern?
The color can be changed when the “Menu screen + Focus” test pattern is displayed.
- Press qw to select the “Menu screen + Focus” test pattern.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button. f The color of the focus test pattern will be changed to the selected color.
What happens to the [TEST PATTERN COLOR] setting when the projector is switched off?
It returns to [WHITE].
Can the colors of the test patterns other than focus test patterns be changed?
No.
How many signals can be registered to the projector?
Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
How many pages are there for memory numbers?
There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers.
How is a signal registered?
The signal is registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
How is the name to be registered determined?
The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.
When will new signals be registered?
If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
How do you rename a registered signal?
- Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed. f The memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed. f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [SIGNAL LIST] screen.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
- After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns. f When pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.
How do you delete the registered signal?
- Press asqw to select the signal to delete.
- Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed. f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The selected signal will be deleted.
Can a registered signal also be deleted from the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen?
Yes, from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE].
How do you protect the registered signal?
- Press asqw to select the signal to protect.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [LOCK].
- Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button. [OFF] The signal is not protected. [ON] The signal is protected.
When is a lock icon displayed at the right of the [SIGNAL LIST] screen?
When [LOCK] is set to [ON].
What happens when [LOCK] is set to [ON]?
Signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available.
How do you perform these operations when [LOCK] is set to [ON]?
Set [LOCK] to [OFF].
Can a signal be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected?
Yes.
Will a protected signal be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed?
Yes.
How do you expand the signal lock-in range?
- Press asqw to select the signal to set.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].
- Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button. [NARROW] Select this item usually. [WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
When is an expansion icon displayed at the right of the [SIGNAL LIST] screen?
When [LOCK-IN RANGE] is set to [WIDE].
What does switching the range do?
It switches the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.
How do you prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal?
Set this function to [WIDE].
When should you use the [WIDE] setting?
In cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
From which terminals can this function be used?
This function can be used only when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, the <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <DVI-D IN> terminal, the <HDMI IN> terminal, or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
What may happen to the image when [WIDE] is set?
The image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies slightly.
When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], which signal will be prioritized?
A registered signal with a high memory number receives priority. Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
What happens to the settings when a registration signal is deleted?
The settings are also deleted.
In what environment are signals sometimes not determined correctly when the setting is set to [WIDE]?
In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal.
What is the sub memory function?
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
When should you use the sub memory function?
Use this function when you need to switch the aspect or adjust the picture quality such as the white balance while using the same signal source.
What does the sub memory include?
The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal, such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] menu (items such as [CONTRAST] and [BRIGHTNESS]).
How do you register to the sub memory?
- While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw. f The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3). f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed. f The <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of qw when [SUB MEMORY] is selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
- Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f To rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”.
How do you switch to the sub memory?
- While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw. f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f This switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
How do you delete the sub memory?
- While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw. f The [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed. f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The selected sub memory will be deleted.
What is the initial password when using the projector for the first time?
Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
When are you prompted to enter a password?
When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button.
What should you do after you enter the preset password?
Continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
What should you do if the password has been changed previously?
Enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
How is the entered password displayed?
The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
What will happen when the entered password is incorrect?
An error message is displayed on the screen. Re-enter the correct password.
When is the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen displayed?
When the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set to the <OFF> side.
What happens when the entered password is incorrect?
The operation will be restricted to the power standby <v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>).
How do you enable or disable the security password entry?
- Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].
- Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button. [OFF] Disables the security password entry. [ON] Enables the security password entry.
What is the factory default setting for this item?
This item is set to [OFF] in the factory default setting.
When else is this item set to [OFF]?
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
When should you set it to [ON]?
As necessary.
How often should you change the password?
Periodically, use a password that is hard to guess.
When is the security password enabled?
After setting the item to [ON] and setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
How do you change the security password?
- Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw and the number (<0> – <9>) buttons to set the password. f Up to eight button operations can be set.
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
- Press the <ENTER> button.
What happens when numerical values are used for the security password and the remote control is lost?
The security password is required to be initialized.
Who should you consult with for the method of initialization?
Consult your dealer.
How do you overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image?
- Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].
- Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button. [OFF] Hides the security message. [TEXT] Displays the text set in the [SECURITY] menu → [TEXT CHANGE]. [USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
What should you use to create/register the [USER LOGO] image?
Use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
How do you edit the text to be displayed when [TEXT] is selected in [DISPLAY SETTING]?
- Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
- Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The text is changed.
How do you enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control?
- Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL]. [CONTROL PANEL] Sets the limitation on the control from the control panel. [REMOTE CONTROL] Sets the limitation on the control from the remote control.
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
- Press qw to switch the item. f You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control. [ENABLE] Enables all button operations. [DISABLE] Disables all button operations. [USER] Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
- Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. f The confirmation screen is displayed.
- Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
How do you enable/disable any button?
- Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
- Press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
- Press qw to switch [USER].
- Press as to select the button item to set. f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select the button to set.
What buttons can be set on the CONTROL PANEL?
- [POWER BUTTON] Power standby <v> button, power on <b> button
- [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button*1
- [MENU BUTTON] <MENU> button
- [LENS BUTTON] <LENS> button Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
- [AUTO SETUP BUTTON] <AUTO SETUP> button
- [SHUTTER BUTTON] <SHUTTER> button
- [OTHER BUTTON] asqw, <ENTER> button Buttons not listed above
What buttons can be set on the REMOTE CONTROL?
- [VIDEO] button, <RGB1/2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button*1
- [ON SCREEN BUTTON] ― <ON SCREEN> button
- [OTHER BUTTON] asqw, <ENTER> button Buttons not listed above
What do the ENABLE and DISABLE buttons do?
[ENABLE] Enables button operations. [DISABLE] Disables button operations.
What items can be selected only when [RGB1/2 BUTTON] of [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected?
- [TOGGLE] Switches between [RGB1] and [RGB2] when the button is operated.
- [RGB1] Fixes to [RGB1].
- [RGB2] Fixes to [RGB2].
- [DISABLE] Disables button operations.
What should you do when [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7) and the switching of the item is completed?
Press the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen.
Once you have selected your settings, press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. What happens next?
The confirmation screen is displayed.
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. What happens next?
This completes the setup.
What happens when a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE]?
The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed. Enter the control device password.
What will happen to the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds?
It will disappear.
What happens if the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE]?
The projector cannot be turned off (cannot enter standby).
What happens when the setting has completed?
The menu screen will disappear.
How do you operate continuously?
Press the <MENU> button to display the main menu.
Is the operation of the <ID SET> button on the remote control enabled even when button operations on the remote control are disabled?
Yes.
How do you change the control device password?
- Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].
- Press the <ENTER> button. f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
- Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
- Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f To cancel, select [CANCEL].
What is the initial password for the control device?
“AAAA”
When is the initial password the factory default?
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [ALL USER DATA] is executed.
How often should you change the control device password?
Periodically. Choose a password that is hard to guess.
What is the SDI input supported for?
PT-RZ970.
How do you switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector?
- Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
What are the possible communication modes and their settings?
Possible communication modes l: Communication possible ―: Communication not possible
| Setting | Video transfer (100 m (328’1")) | Video transfer (150 m (492’2")) | Ethernet | RS-232C |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| [AUTO] For DIGITAL LINK | l | ― | l | l |
| For long reach | ― | l | l | l |
| For Ethernet | ― | ― | l*¹ | ― |
| [DIGITAL LINK] | l | ― | l | l |
| [LONG REACH] | ― | l | l | l |
| [ETHERNET] | ― | ― | l*¹ | ― |
*¹ Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.
What is the maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method?
The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492’2"). In this case, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
If the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, what will the projector connect with?
If the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach communication method when the item is set to [AUTO].
How do you connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET-YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method?
To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET-YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method, set the item to [LONG REACH].
Will a connection be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method, even when the item is set to [LONG REACH]?
No. Even when the item is set to [LONG REACH], connection will not be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method.
How do you display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment?
- Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
What is [SIGNAL QUALITY]?
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to green, yellow, or red depending on that value. Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
What do the colors indicate for [SIGNAL QUALITY]?
- Green (-12 dB or lower) → normal signal quality level.
- Yellow (-11 to -8 dB) → caution level that noise may appear on the screen.
- Red (-7 dB or higher) → abnormal level with interrupted synchronization and receiving not possible.
How do you perform the initial setting of the network before using the network function?
- Press as to select [NETWORK SETUP].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [NETWORK SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the menu.
- Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
What should you confirm when using a DHCP server?
When using a DHCP server, confirm that the DHCP server is running.
Who should you consult regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway?
Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
When can’t [NETWORK SETUP] be selected?
[NETWORK SETUP] cannot be selected when the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)].
How do you set up the control method of the network?
- Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
- Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
What does setting [EXTRON XTP] to [ON] do?
Setting [EXTRON XTP] to [ON] connects the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
What does setting [EXTRON XTP] to [OFF] do?
Setting [EXTRON XTP] to [OFF] connects the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G).
How do you display the status of the projector network?
- Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
When can’t [DIGITAL LINK MENU] be selected?
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON].
How do you make settings to use the Art-Net function?
- Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].
- Press qw to switch the item. The items will switch each time you press the button.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select an item, and press qw to switch the setting.
- Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, how is the IP address set?
If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, IP address is calculated and set automatically.
How do you set the assignment of the channel?
- Press as to select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING].
- Press qw to switch the item.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] screen is displayed.
- Press as to select the channel to set, and press qw to switch the item.
How do you display the content of control assigned to each channel and the received data of that channel?
- Press as to select [Art-Net STATUS].
- Press the <ENTER> button. The [Art-Net STATUS] screen is displayed.
How do you connect the projector to the network?
The projector can receive the Ethernet signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter together with the video and serial control signal via the LAN cable.
What precautions should be taken when a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector?
When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
What type of LAN cable is required to use the network function?
Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable (straight or crossover) automatically.
What is the maximum length of the LAN cable?
Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328’1") or shorter.
What are the criteria for the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector?
- Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
- Shielded type (including connectors)
- Straight-through
- Single wire
What is the maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector?
The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328’1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492’2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz) for the long-reach communication method. If this distance is exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication.
What should you confirm when laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector?
When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer. When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
Can you use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector?
No. Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
How should the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector be laid?
- Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
- To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector without any loops.
- Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
- When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
What should you confirm after laying the cables?
After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality.
Where can you find information about twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector?
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the Panasonic website (https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/). Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
How do you set up the projector?
- Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
- Turn on the power of the projector.
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu, select [NETWORK SETUP], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Perform the [NETWORK SETUP] setting. Refer to [NETWORK SETUP] for details.
What is the factory default setting?
- [DHCP] OFF
- [IP ADDRESS] 192.168.0.8
- [SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
- [DEFAULT GATEWAY] 192.168.0.1
- [DNS1]/[DNS2] None
How do you operate the computer?
- Turn on the power of the computer.
- Perform the network setting following the instruction of your network administrator. Operation from the computer is possible by configuring the network setting of the computer as follows if the projector is in the factory default setting.
- [IP ADDRESS] 192.168.0.10
- [SUBNET MASK] 255.255.255.0
- [DEFAULT GATEWAY] 192.168.0.1
What operations can be performed from a computer using the web control function?
The following operations are possible from a computer using the web control function:
- Setting and adjustment of the projector
- Display of the projector status
- Sending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
What application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. can be used with the projector?
The projector supports “Crestron ConnectedTM”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. can be used:
- RoomView Express
- Fusion RV
- RoomView Server Edition
What is required to use the E-mail function?
Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
What is “Crestron ConnectedTM”?
“Crestron ConnectedTM” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems connected to a network using a computer.
Where can you find details about “Crestron ConnectedTM”?
For details of the “Crestron ConnectedTM”, visit the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only.) URL http://www.crestron.com
Where can you download “RoomView Express”?
Download “RoomView Express” from the Crestron Electronics, Inc. website. (English only.) URL http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
What is required to use the web control function?
To use the web control function, a web browser is required. Confirm that the web browser can be used in advance.
What are the compatible browsers for each OS?
| OS | Compatible browser |
|---|---|
| Windows | Internet Explorer 11.0, Microsoft Edge |
| Mac OS | Safari 6.0/7.0/8.0/9.0 |
How do you access the web control function from the web browser?
- Start up the web browser on the computer.
- Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
- Enter the user name and the password. The factory default setting of the user name is user1 (user rights)/admin1 (administrator rights) and the password is panasonic (lower case).
- Click OK. The [Projector status] page is displayed.
How do you control the projector from a web browser?
If you use a web browser to control the projector, set the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] to [ON].
Can you perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers?
No. Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple computers.
What happens when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively?
Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
What may happen if the web browser is set not to use the Javascript function?
Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser. Correct control may not be possible when the web browser is set not to use this function.
What should you do if the screen for the web control is not displayed?
If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
What are the rights for each account?
The administrator rights allow use of all functions. There is a limitation in the rights that can be used with the user rights. Select the rights depending on the purpose. The function that has l in the administrator rights/user rights column indicates that it can be operated with that rights.
What are the functions and rights for each account?
| Item | Function | Administrator rights | User rights |
|---|---|---|---|
| [Status] | [Projector status] | l | l |
| Error information page | l | l | |
| [Network status] | l | l | |
| [Access error log] | l | ― | |
| [Mail error log] | l | ― | |
| [Projector control] | [Basic control] | l | l |
| [Detail control] | l | ― | |
| [Detailed set up] | [Network config] | l | ― |
| [Adjust clock] | l | ― | |
| [Ping test] | l | ― | |
| [E-mail set up] | l | ― | |
| [Authentication set up] | l | ― | |
| [Change password] | User name of [Administrator] | l | ― |
| User name of [User] | l | ― | |
| Password of [Administrator] | l | ― | |
| Password of [User] | l | l | |
| [Crestron Connected™] | Operation page | l | ― |
| [Tools] | l | ― | |
| [Info] | l | ― | |
| [Help] | l | ― |
How do you navigate through the menu screen?
- Press the <MENU> button to display the main menu.
- Press as to select the desired main menu. The sub-menu for the selected item is displayed.
- Press as to select the desired item on the sub-menu.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the selection.
- To return to the previous screen, press the <MENU> button. While an item selection screen is displayed, the menu screen will return one level up each time the button is pressed.
- Press the <MENU> button again to close the menu screen. [PDF]
How do you adjust the menu items?
- Select the menu item.
- Press qw to change the setting value or to select an item. The settings will change each time the button is pressed.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting or selection. Depending on the item, the input numeric value screen may appear after pressing the <ENTER> button. If so, enter the value and press the <ENTER> button again. [PDF]
How do you use the input numeric value screen?
- Press qw to select the digit to change.
- Press as to change the numeric value.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the value and return to the previous screen. [PDF]
How do you control the projector using the control panel?
- <POWER> button Press this button to turn the power on. Press and hold this button to turn the power off.
- <INPUT> button Press this button to display the input signal selection screen.
- <STATUS> button Press this button to display the projector status.
- as buttons Use these buttons to select an item from the menu, or to adjust the value.
- <ENTER> button Press this button to confirm the selection or setting.
- <MENU> button Press this button to display or close the menu screen. [PDF]
How do you control the projector using the remote control unit?
- <POWER> button Press this button to turn the power on. Press and hold this button to turn the power off.
- <INPUT> button Press this button to display the input signal selection screen.
- <AUTO SETUP> button Press this button to perform the automatic setup. For details, refer to “Automatic setup function”.
- <A/V MUTE> button Press this button to mute the image and audio. Press the button again to cancel the mute.
- <FREEZE> button Press this button to freeze the projected image. Press the button again to resume projection.
- <ID SET> button Press this button to set the projector ID No.
- <LENS> button Press this button to display the lens adjustment menu.
- <BLANK> button Press this button to close the shutter and blank the projected image. Press this button again to open the shutter.
- <INFO> button Press this button to display the projector status.
- <STATUS> button Press this button to display the projector status.
- <DIRECT POWER OFF> button Press this button to turn the power off.
- Number buttons Press these buttons to enter numeric values directly.
- asqw buttons Use these buttons to select an item from the menu, or to adjust the value.
- <ENTER> button Press this button to confirm the selection or setting.
- <MENU> button Press this button to display or close the menu screen.
- <RETURN> button Press this button to return to the previous screen. [PDF]
How do you connect an external device to each terminal?
- VIDEO IN terminal Connect the video output terminal of an external device. The VIDEO IN terminal is compatible with composite video signals.
- AUDIO IN terminal (L/MONO, R) Connect the audio output terminal of an external device. Connect the left (L) and right ® output terminals of an external device to input stereo sound. If an external device is equipped with a monaural output terminal, connect it to the left (L/MONO) terminal.
- COMPUTER 1 IN terminal Connect the RGB output terminal of an external device such as a personal computer. When connecting to a device that supports Plug and Play, such as a Windows computer, turn on the projector first.
- MONITOR OUT terminal Connect the RGB input terminal of an external display device, such as a monitor. Connect this terminal to output the signal from the selected input terminal.
- AUDIO OUT terminal (VARIABLE) Connect the audio input terminal of an external device, such as a powered speaker. Connect this terminal to output the audio signal from the selected input terminal. The output volume can be adjusted.
- SERIAL IN terminal Connect the serial output terminal of an external control device.
- SERIAL OUT terminal Connect the serial input terminal of an external control device.
- LAN/DIGITAL LINK terminal Connect the network cable or the LAN cable to connect to a network. This terminal can receive video signals, audio signals, and control signals from the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET-YFB200G), or the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics.
- DC 12 V OUT terminal Connect this terminal to an external device that needs a DC 12 V power supply, such as the optional powered wireless projector adapter (Model No.: ET-WPG100). The power can be supplied from this terminal only when the projector is turned on.
- AC IN terminal Connect the included power cord. [PDF]
How do you insert the batteries into the remote control?
- Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
- Insert two AA batteries. Align the + and – poles of the batteries with the markings inside the case.
- Close the battery cover. [PDF]
How do you clean the air filter?
- If the message “CLEAN FILTER” appears, or if the cooling fan noise becomes louder, clean the air filter. If you continue to use the projector without cleaning the air filter, the internal temperature of the projector may rise, shortening the service life of the lamp.
- When removing the air filter, take care not to touch the lamp, which is extremely hot.
- Do not use volatile liquids, such as thinner or benzine, to clean the air filter. Do not subject the filter to heat such as from a dryer.
- Turn off the power of the projector.
- Disconnect the power cord.
- Open the lamp cover lever, and open the lamp cover.
- Hold the handle and pull out the air filter.
- Clean the air filter. Use a vacuum cleaner or lightly tap the filter to remove dust. If the filter is very dirty, wash it with water, taking care not to damage it. Dry the filter completely in the shade before re-installing it.
- Insert the air filter completely into the main unit.
- Close the lamp cover and close the lamp cover lever. [PDF]
How do you replace the lamp?
Caution:
- The lamp becomes extremely hot a few minutes after the power is turned off. Be sure to allow the lamp to cool down before replacing it. If the lamp is touched when hot, it may cause burns.
- When removing the lamp, take care not to touch the lamp with bare hands as fingerprints may impair the projection brightness.
- If the lamp breaks, small pieces of glass may scatter inside the unit. If this happens, contact your dealer to request cleaning of the unit.
- Do not use a lamp other than the specified lamp for this projector. Using a lamp other than the specified lamp may result in fire or explosion.
- Do not touch the lamp with bare hands.
- Turn off the power of the projector, and disconnect the power cord.
- Open the lamp cover lever, and open the lamp cover.
- Loosen the screws holding the lamp in place (3 locations), and slowly remove the lamp while holding the handle. Do not drop the lamp when removing it.
- Insert the new lamp slowly while holding the handle. Align the lamp so that it fits in place.
- Tighten the screws firmly (3 locations).
- Close the lamp cover and close the lamp cover lever.
- Connect the power cord.
- Turn on the projector and reset the lamp replacement counter. After replacing the lamp, be sure to reset the lamp replacement counter. The procedure to reset the lamp replacement counter is described below.
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [SETUP] menu, select [Lamp Counter Reset], and press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [YES], and press the <ENTER> button. The lamp replacement counter is reset. [PDF]
How do you replace the lamp in ceiling-mounted installation?
Caution:
- The lamp may fall when the lamp module is removed. Take care to prevent the lamp from falling.
- When performing operations above the ceiling, ensure that at least 2 people are present to prevent falls and injuries.
- Take safety measures against falling objects.
- For safety reasons, wear safety glasses when performing work.
- Turn off the power of the projector, and disconnect the power cord.
- Use a flathead screwdriver or similar tool to push the lamp module release button in the direction of the arrow and remove the lamp module.
- Replace the lamp with a new one. Align the protrusions on the lamp module with the recesses in the projector, and then slide the module in until it clicks.
- Connect the power cord.
- Turn on the projector and reset the lamp replacement counter. After replacing the lamp, be sure to reset the lamp replacement counter. The procedure to reset the lamp replacement counter is described below.
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [SETUP] menu, select [Lamp Counter Reset], and press the <ENTER> button.
- When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [YES], and press the <ENTER> button. The lamp replacement counter is reset. [PDF]
How do you perform an automatic setup?
- Point the remote control at the projector.
- Press the <AUTO SETUP> button. Automatic setup starts. While automatic setup is being performed, the message “AUTO SETUP” appears and the <STATUS> indicator flashes in green. When automatic setup is finished, the message “AUTO SETUP COMPLETE” appears for about 3 seconds. The lens adjustments are made to optimize the screen for the projected image.
Notes:
- Automatic setup is not available when the input signal is other than the computer signal.
- If automatic setup cannot be performed properly, the message “AUTO SETUP FAIL” appears for about 3 seconds. In this case, check the input signal and the projection screen. Refer to “Troubleshooting” for details.
- For fine adjustment, use manual adjustment. Refer to each item under “[LENS] menu” for details. [PDF]
How do you select the input signal?
Using the projector’s control panel:
- Press the <INPUT> button. The input signal selection screen appears.
- Press as to select the desired input terminal.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The signal from the selected input terminal is projected.
Using the remote control:
- Press the <INPUT> button. The input signal selection screen appears.
- Press asqw to select the desired input terminal.
- Press the <ENTER> button. The signal from the selected input terminal is projected. [PDF]
How do you switch the aspect ratio?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [PICTURE] menu, select [Aspect], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select the aspect ratio.
Notes:
- If the input signal is 4:3 and [16:9] is selected, black bands will appear to the left and right of the image.
- If the input signal is 16:9 and [4:3] is selected, black bands will appear above and below the image.
- When [Native] is selected, the aspect ratio is fixed to the same aspect ratio of the input signal. However, the aspect ratio will be 4:3 when the input signal is 640 x 480 dots. [PDF]
How do you perform the test pattern projection?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [PICTURE] menu, select [Test Pattern], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press qw to select the test pattern, and press the <ENTER> button. The selected test pattern is projected.
- To close the test pattern, press qw to select [OFF], and press the <ENTER> button. [PDF]
How do you adjust the lens position?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [LENS] menu, select [Lens Position], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press qw to select the item to adjust.
- Press as to adjust.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting.
Notes:
- To return to the initial position, press the <RESET> button. [PDF]
How do you adjust the lens focus?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [LENS] menu, select [Focus], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to adjust the focus.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting.
Notes:
- To return to the initial position, press the <RESET> button. [PDF]
How do you adjust the lens zoom?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [LENS] menu, select [Zoom], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to adjust the zoom.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting.
Notes:
- To return to the initial position, press the <RESET> button. [PDF]
How do you adjust the keystone?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [PICTURE] menu, select [Keystone], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select the item to adjust.
- Press qw to adjust.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting.
Notes:
- To return to the initial position, press the <RESET> button.
- To automatically adjust the keystone, select [Auto], and press the <ENTER> button. However, the [Vertical] keystone will not be adjusted. [PDF]
How do you correct distortion of the image?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [PICTURE] menu, select [Curved Screen Correction], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press qw to select [ON] or [OFF]. Select [ON] to correct the distortion of the image projected onto a curved screen. If the image is projected onto a flat screen, select [OFF]. [PDF]
What is the function of the [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] menu?
The items on the [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] menu are used to adjust the projected image to match the screen. Select the appropriate item from this menu when using the projector with a special screen, such as a curved screen, or when an image distortion occurs. [PDF]
How do you make a geometric adjustment using the remote control?
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] menu, select [Geometric Adjustment], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press qw to adjust.
- Press the <ENTER> button to confirm the setting. Proceed to Step 2) to adjust another item.
Notes:
- To return to the initial position, press the <RESET> button.
- Geometric adjustment can be performed for each corner point. To perform detailed adjustment, use [Corner Correction] in the [Geometric Adjustment] menu. Refer to “Adjusting each corner point” for details. [PDF]
How do you adjust each corner point?
Notes:
- Adjustment can be made in a range of ±32 for each direction of the corner point.
- Adjustment can be made in a range of ±16 for each direction of the side.
- Press the <MENU> button to open the [SCREEN ADJUSTMENT] menu, select [Geometric Adjustment], and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to select [Corner Correction], and press the <ENTER> button. The [Corner Correction] screen appears.
- Press qw to select the point (or side) to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
- Press as to adjust the position of the selected point (or side), and press the <ENTER> button. The setting is stored automatically and the [Corner Correction] screen returns to its original state.
- Repeat Steps 3) and 4) to adjust other points or sides.
- Press the <RETURN> button to return to the previous screen. [PDF]
How do I switch pages?
Click the Page tab.
What is displayed when I click the [Status] item?
The status of the projector is displayed.
What page is displayed when I click the [Projector control] item?
The [Projector control] page is displayed.
What page is displayed when I click the [Detailed set up] item?
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed.
What page is displayed when I click the [Change password] item?
The [Change password] page is displayed.
What page is displayed when I click the [Crestron Connected™] item?
The operation page of Crestron ConnectedTM is displayed.
How do I display the [Projector status] page?
Click [Status] → [Projector status].
What does the [Projector status] page display?
The status of the projector for the following items:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| [PROJECTOR TYPE] | Displays the type of the projector. |
| [MAIN VERSION] | Displays the firmware version of the projector. |
| [POWER] | Displays the status of the power. |
| [SHUTTER] | Displays the status of the shutter function ([CLOSE]: Enabled (closed), [OPEN]: Disabled (open)). |
| [OPERATING MODE] | Displays the setting status of [OPERATING MODE]. |
| [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] | Displays the setting status of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]. |
| [SERIAL NUMBER] | Displays the serial number of the projector. |
| [REMOTE2 STATUS] | Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal. |
| [OSD] | Displays the status of the on-screen display. |
| [LIGHT OUTPUT] | Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT]. |
| [INPUT] | Displays the status of the selected input. |
| [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] | Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector. |
| [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE] | Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector. |
| [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE] | Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the projector. |
| [LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE], [LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE] | Displays the temperature status of the light source. |
| [LIGHT1], [LIGHT2] | Displays the lighting status and runtime of the light source. |
| [SELF TEST] | Displays the self-diagnosis information. |
| [PROJECTOR RUNTIME] | Displays the runtime of the projector. |
How do I display the content of an error/warning?
When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display field of the [Projector status] screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.
What might happen depending on the error content?
The projector may go into standby status to protect the projector.
What do the self-diagnosis result displays indicate?
- [OK]: Indicates that operation is normal.
- [FAILED]: Indicates that there is a problem.
- [WARNING]: Indicates that there is a warning.
What does the [MAIN CPU BUS] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your dealer.
What does the [FAN] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
What does the [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The intake air temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
What does the [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high. The projector may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
What does the [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The exhaust air temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance. Or the air exhaust port may be blocked.
What does the [LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The temperature of the light source is high. The projector may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
What does the [LIGHT1 STATUS] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The light source has failed to turn on. Consult your dealer.
What does the [INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake air temperature. Consult your dealer.
What does the [OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect the temperature inside the projector. Consult your dealer.
What does the [EXHAUST AIR TEMP.SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air temperature. Consult your dealer.
What does the [LIGHT1 TEMP.SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the temperature detection sensor of the light source. Consult your dealer.
What does the [COLOR WHEEL] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the color wheel or the color wheel drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
What does the [LENS MOUNTER] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the lens mounter. Consult your dealer.
What does the [BRIGHTNESS SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the luminance sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the power, consult your dealer.
What does the [ANGLE SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the angle sensor. Consult your dealer.
What does the [ATM SENSOR] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the air pressure sensor. Consult your dealer.
What does the [PHOSPHOR WHEEL1] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the phosphor wheel 1 or phosphor wheel 1 drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
What does the [PHOSPHOR WHEEL2] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
There is a problem with the phosphor wheel 2 or phosphor wheel 2 drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
What does the [LOW-TEMPERATURE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is low. Image cannot be projected until the optics module becomes warm.
What does the [BATTERY] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
What does the [AC VOLTAGE] self-diagnosis result indicate and what should I do?
The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.
How do I display the [Network status] page?
Click [Status] → [Network status].
What does the [Network status] page display?
The current network setting status.
How do I display the [Access error log] page?
Click [Status] → [Access error log].
What does the [Access error log] page display?
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with unauthorized user names or passwords.
How do I display the [Mail error log] page?
Click [Status] → [Mail error log].
What does the [Mail error log] page display?
E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.
What is important to note about the [Access error log] and [Mail error log]?
- [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many accesses/requests are made at once.
- Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.
- Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
How do I display the [Basic control] page?
Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].
What does the [POWER] button do?
Turns the power off/on.
What does the [SHUTTER] button do?
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: closed)/disabled (shutter: open)).
What does the [OSD] button do?
Switches off (hide)/on (display) the on-screen display function.
What does the [SYSTEM] button do?
Switches the system method.
What does the on-screen display of the projector display?
The same items as shown on the on-screen display of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is set to off (hide).
What does the [INPUT SELECT] button do?
Switches the input signal (SDI input is supported only for PT-RZ970).
How do I display the [Detail control] page?
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].
How is the projector controlled on the [Detail control] page?
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is updated.
What does the [SUB MEMORY] button do?
Switches the sub memory.
What does the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] button do?
Switches the system daylight view settings.
What does the [FREEZE] button do?
Temporarily pauses the image.
What does the [P IN P] button do?
Switches the P IN P setting.
What does the [WAVEFORM MONITOR] button do?
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
What does the [PROJECTION METHOD] button do?
Switches the setting of the projection method.
What does the [LENS] button do?
Adjusts the projection lens.
What does the [TEST PATTERN] button do?
Displays the test pattern.
What does the [GET OSD] button do?
Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the control page.
How do I display the [Network config] page?
Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].
What happens when I click [Network config]?
- Click [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
- Click the [Next] button to display the current settings.
- Click the [Change] button to display the setting change screen.
What should I enter into the [PROJECTOR NAME] field?
Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is required when using a DHCP server, etc.
How do I enable the DHCP client function?
Set the [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF] to [DHCP ON].
What should I enter into the [IP ADDRESS] field?
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.
What should I enter into the [SUBNET MASK] field?
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
What should I enter into the [DEFAULT GATEWAY] field?
Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server.
What should I enter into the [DNS1] field?
Enter the DNS1 server address. Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address (primary): Numbers (0 – 9), period (.) (Example: 192.168.0.253).
What should I enter into the [DNS2] field?
Enter the DNS2 server address. Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address (secondary): Numbers (0 – 9), period (.) (Example: 192.168.0.254).
What do the [Back], [Next] and [Submit] buttons do?
- Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen.
- Click the [Next] button to display the setting confirmation screen.
- Click the [Submit] button to update the setting.
What is important to note about using the [Network config] page?
- When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click [Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
- The connection may be disconnected when the LAN setting is changed while connected with LAN.
How do I display the [Adjust clock] page?
Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].
What should I select in the [Time Zone] field?
Select the time zone.
What does the [Set time zone] button do?
Updates the time zone setting.
When should I set the [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] to [ON]?
When adjusting the date and time automatically.
What should I enter into the [NTP SERVER NAME] field?
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when you set to adjust the date and time manually (To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up).
What should I enter into the [Date] field?
Enter the date to be changed.
What should I enter into the [Time] field?
Enter the time to be changed.
What does the [Submit] button do?
Updates the date and time settings.
What is important to note about the [Adjust clock] page?
The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult your dealer.
How do I check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.?
Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].
What should I enter into the [Input IP address] field?
Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
What does the [Submit] button do?
Executes the connection test.
What is an example of the display when the connection has succeeded?
PING 192 . 168 . 0.8 (192.168 . 0.8) : 56 data byte3
64 bytes from 192.168.0.8: seq=O ttl=128 time=l ma
64 bytes from 192 . 163 . 0 . 8: seq=l ttl=128 time=l ma
64 byte5 from 192 . 168 . 0 . 8 : 3eq=2 ttl=128 time=l ma
64 bytes from 192 . 168 . 0 . 8 : seq=3 ttl=128 time=l ma
--- 192 . 168 . 0. 8 ping 3tati.9tic::i ---
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round- trip min/avg/max = 1/1/1 ms
What is an example of the display when the connection has failed?
PING 192 . 168 . 0 . 220 (192 . 168 . 0 . 220) : 56 data bytes
--- 192 . 168 . 0 . 220 pi.ng stat1.st1.cs ---
# 4 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss --
What does the [E-mail set up] page allow?
E-mail can be sent to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses) periodically or when an error or problem has occurred.
How do I display the [E-mail set up] page?
Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].
When should I select [ENABLE]?
To use the E-mail function.
What should I enter into the [SMTP SERVER NAME] field?
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server (SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.
What should I enter into the [MAIL FROM] field?
Enter the E-mail address of the projector (Up to 63 characters in a single byte).
What should I enter into the [MEMO] field?
Enter information such as the location of the projector that notifies the sender of the E-mail (Up to 63 characters in a single byte).
What does the [MINIMUM TIME] setting do?
Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning temperature.
What does the [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] setting do?
Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the temperature exceeds this value.
What should I enter into the [E‑MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E‑MAIL ADDRESS 2] fields?
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.
What do the settings of the conditions to send E-mail do?
Select the conditions to send E-mail.
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| [MAIL CONTENTS] | Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE]. |
| [ERROR] | Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis. |
| [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] | Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached the value set at the above field. |
| [PERIODIC REPORT] | Place a checkmark on this to send an E-mail periodically. It will be sent on the days and time with the checkmark. |
What does the [Submit] button do?
Update the settings.
What does the [Authentication set up] page allow?
Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
How do I display the [Authentication set up] page?
Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].
What should I select from the [Auth] dropdown menu?
Select the authentication method specified by your Internet service provider.
When should I set [SMTP Auth]?
When the SMTP authentication is selected.
What should I enter into the [POP server name] field?
Enter the POP server name. Allowed characters: Alphanumerics (A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9) Minus sign (-) and period (.).
What should I enter into the [User name] field?
Enter the username for the POP server or the SMTP server.
What should I enter into the [Password] field?
Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
What should I enter into the [SMTP server port] field?
Enter the port number of the SMTP server (Normally 25).
What should I enter into the [POP server port] field?
Enter the port number of the POP server (Normally 110).
What does the [Submit] button do?
Update the settings.
What is an example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set?
The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established:
=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===
Projector Type : RZ970
Serial No : 123456789012
----- E-mail setup data -----
TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 31 degC / 87 degF ]
ERROR [ ON ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ ON ]
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday [ ON ] Monday [ ON ] Tuesday [ ON ] Wednesday [ ON ] Thursday [ ON ] Friday [ ON ] Saturday [ ON ]
00:00 [ ON ] 01:00 [ ON ] 02:00 [ ON ] 03:00 [ ON ] 04:00 [ ON ] 05:00 [ ON ] 06:00 [ ON ] 07:00 [ ON ] 08:00 [ ON ] 09:00 [ ON ] 10:00 [ ON ] 11:00 [ ON ] 12:00 [ ON ] 13:00 [ ON ] 14:00 [ ON ] 15:00 [ ON ] 16:00 [ ON ] 17:00 [ ON ] 18:00 [ ON ] 19:00 [ ON ] 20:00 [ ON ] 21:00 [ ON ] 22:00 [ ON ] 23:00 [ ON ]
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ OK ] FAN [ OK ] INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ] OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ] EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ] LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE [ OK ] LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE [ OK ] LIGHT1 STATUS [ OK ] LIGHT2 STATUS [ OK ] INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ] OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ] EXHAUST AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ] LIGHT1 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ] LIGHT2 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ] BATTERY [ OK ] COLOR WHEEL [ OK ] LENS MOUNTER [ OK ] BRIGHTNESS SENSOR [ OK ] ANGLE SENSOR [ OK ] ATM SENSOR [ OK ] PHOSPHOR WHEEL1 [ OK ] PHOSPHOR WHEEL2 [ OK ] AC VOLTAGE [ OK ]
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00)
Intake air temperature : 25 degC / 77 degF
Optics module temperature : 25 degC / 77 degF
Exhaust air temperature : 25 degC / 77 degF
Light1 temperature : 35 degC / 95 degF
Light2 temperature : 35 degC / 95 degF
PROJECTOR RUNTIME 100 H
POWER ON 100 times
LIGHT1 RUNTIME 100 H
LIGHT1 ON 100 times
LIGHT2 RUNTIME 100 H
LIGHT2 ON 100 times
-------- Current status ---------
MAIN VERSION 1.00
SUB VERSION 1.00
LIGHT STATUS LIGHT1=ON LIGHT2=ON
INPUT RGB2
SIGNAL NAME 1024x768
SIGNAL FREQUENCY 48.22kHz / 59.85Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----
DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0.8
MAC address 12:34:56:78:90:12
**What is an example of the E-mail sent for an error?**
The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred:
=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===
Projector Type: RZ970 Serial No: 123456789012
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ OK ]
FAN [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LIGHT1 STATUS [ OK ]
LIGHT2 STATUS [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
EXHAUST AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
LIGHT1 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
LIGHT2 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
BATTERY [ OK ]
COLOR WHEEL [ OK ]
LENS MOUNTER [ OK ]
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR [ FAILED ]
ANGLE SENSOR [ OK ]
ATM SENSOR [ OK ]
PHOSPHOR WHEEL1 [ OK ]
PHOSPHOR WHEEL2 [ OK ]
AC VOLTAGE [ OK ]
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00)
**How do I change the password?**
Click [Change password].
**How do I change the administrator settings?**
Use the [Administrator] option. It is used to change the setting of the [Administrator].
**How do I change the user settings?**
Use the [User] option. It is used to change the setting of the [User].
**How do I go to the next settings menu?**
Use the [Next] option. It is used to change the setting of the password.
**What does the [Account] display?**
The [Account] displays the account to change.
**What do I enter into the [Current] settings?**
[User name]: Enter the user name before the change.
[Password]: Enter the current password.
**What do I enter into the [New] settings?**
[User name]: Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)
[Password]: Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)
[Password(Retype)]: Enter the desired new password again.
**What does the [OK] button do?**
The [OK] button determines the change of password.
**What is the change password process for user rights?**
Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.
**What do I enter for the [Old Password]?**
Enter the current password.
**What do I enter for the [New Password]?**
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)
**What do I enter for the [Retype]?**
Enter the desired new password again.
**How do I change the account of the administrator?**
To change the account of the administrator, you must enter the [User name] and [Password] in [Current].
**How can the projector be monitored/controlled?**
The projector can be monitored/controlled with Crestron ConnectedTM.
**What is needed to start the operation screen of Crestron ConnectedTM from the web control screen?**
It is necessary to access with the administrator rights to start the operation screen of Crestron ConnectedTM from the web control screen.
**When is the [Crestron Connected(TM)] button not displayed?**
The [Crestron Connected(TM)] button is not displayed in the web control screen with the user rights.
**What do I do if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on the computer, or the browser does not support Flash?**
Click [Back] in the operation page to go back to the previous page.
**What are the tabs for?**
The tabs are for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the projector.
* [Tools]
* [Info]
* [Help]
**What does the [POWER] button do?**
The [POWER] button turns on/off the power.
**What does the [SHUTTER] button do?**
The [SHUTTER] button switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter: closed)/disabled (shutter: open)).
**What does the [Input Select] button do?**
The [Input Select] button controls input selection. It is not available when the power of the projector is turned off.
**What do the Menu screen control buttons do?**
The menu screen control buttons navigates the menu screen.
**What do the Freeze/image quality adjustment buttons do?**
The freeze/image quality adjustment buttons control items related to freeze/image quality.
**What does the [Back] button do?**
The [Back] button returns to the previous page.
**What does the [Control System] setting do?**
The [Control System] setting sets the information required for communicating with the controller to be connected with the projector.
**What does the [User Password] setting do?**
The [User Password] setting sets the user rights password for the operation page of Crestron ConnectedTM.
**What does the [Admin Password] setting do?**
The [Admin Password] setting sets the administrator rights password for the operation page of Crestron ConnectedTM.
**What does the Network status display?**
The Network status displays the settings of wired LAN.
**What does [DHCP] display?**
[DHCP] displays the current setting.
**What does [Ip Address] display?**
[Ip Address] displays the current setting.
**What does [Subnet Mask] display?**
[Subnet Mask] displays the current setting.
**What does [Default Gateway] display?**
[Default Gateway] displays the current setting.
**What does [DNS Server] display?**
[DNS Server] displays the current setting.
**What does the [Exit] button do?**
The [Exit] button returns to the operation page.
**What does the [Projector Name] display?**
The [Projector Name] displays the projector name.
**What does the [Mac Address] display?**
The [Mac Address] displays the MAC address.
**What do [Lamp1 Hours] and [Lamp2 Hours] display?**
[Lamp1 Hours] and [Lamp2 Hours] display the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
**What does the [Power Status] display?**
The [Power Status] displays the status of the power.
**What does [Source] display?**
[Source] displays the selected input.
**What does the [Error Status] display?**
The [Error Status] displays the error status.
**What happens when you click [Help] in the operation page?**
The [Help Desk] window is displayed.
**What does the [Help Desk] allow?**
The [Help Desk] allows for a message to be sent/received with the administrator using the Crestron ConnectedTM.
**What do I do if an indicator lights up?**
If a problem occurs inside the projector, the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> or temperature indicator <TEMP> will inform you by lighting or blinking. Check the status of the indicators and take following measures.
**What procedures do I follow when switching off the projector to deal with problems?**
When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector”.
**What do I do if the light source indicator is lighting in red?**
Some of the elements of the light source are defective and the light output has decreased.
* Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and turn on the power again.
**What do I do if the light source indicator is blinking in red (1 time)?**
The light source is turned off since the projection lens cannot be detected.
* Turn off the power and mount the projection lens again.
* Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and turn on the power again.
**What do I do if the light source indicator is blinking in red (2 times)?**
The light source does not light up, or the light source turns off while the projector is in use.
* Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and turn on the power again.
**What do I do if the light source indicator is blinking in red (3 times)?**
If the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> are still lit or blinking after taking the measures, set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>, and ask your dealer for repairs.
**What does it mean if the light source indicator corresponding to the light source being lit lights up in green?**
The light source indicator corresponding to the light source being lit will light up in green if the projector is in projection mode and there is no indication of problem by lighting or blinking in red.
**What do I do if the temperature indicator <TEMP> is lighting in red?**
The projector is in warm-up status.
* Wait at least five minutes in the current status.
**What do I do if the temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking in red (2 times)?**
Internal temperature is high (warning).
* Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature.
* Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/exhaust port.
* Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature.
* Do not use the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') or higher above sea level.
**What do I do if the temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking in red (3 times)?**
Internal temperature is high (standby status). The cooling fan has stopped.
* Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and consult your dealer.
**What do I do if the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures?**
Ask your dealer for repair.
**What precautions do I take before maintaining the projector?**
* Make sure to turn off the power before performing the maintenance of the projector.
* When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”.
**How do I clean the outer case?**
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
* If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with a dry cloth.
* Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may deteriorate the outer case.
* When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
**How do I clean the lens front surface?**
Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
* Do not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
* Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
* The lens is made of glass. Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface. Handle with care.
**What could happen if dust accumulates around the air intake/exhaust port?**
Dust may accumulate around the air intake/exhaust port depending on the environment and operating condition when used in an environment with excessive dust. This may adversely affect the ventilation, cooling, and heat dissipation inside the projector, thus causing reduced brightness.
**What do I do if the power does not turn on?**
Check the following:
* Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet?
* Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>?
* Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?
* Have the circuit breakers tripped?
* Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> blinking?
* Is the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit or blinking?
**What do I do if no image appears?**
* Are connections to external devices correctly performed?
* Is the input selection setting correct?
* Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum?
* Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?
* Is the shutter function in use?
* If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is blinking in red, consult your dealer.
* Is the lens cover still attached to the lens?
**What do I do if the image is fuzzy?**
* Is the lens focus set correctly?
* Is the projection distance appropriate?
* Is the lens dirty?
* Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?
**What do I do if the image is dark?**
* Is the [CONTRAST] adjustment setting at a minimum?
* Is the setting value of [LIGHT OUTPUT] set small?
* Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> blinking? It may improve by reattaching the projection lens.
**What do I do if the color is pale or grayish?**
* Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly?
* Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly?
* Is the computer cable damaged?
**What do I do if the remote control does not respond?**
* Are the batteries depleted?
* Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly?
* Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver of the projector?
* Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range?
* Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection?
* Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to [DISABLE]?
* Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?
* Is the ID number setting operation correct?
**What do I do if the menu screen does not appear?**
* Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?
**What do I do if the buttons on the control panel do not operate?**
* Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to [DISABLE]?
* Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?
**What do I do if the image does not display correctly?**
* Is [SYSTEM SELECTOR] set properly?
* Is [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] set correctly?
* Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources?
* Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?
**What do I do if the image from a computer does not appear?**
* Is the cable too long? (For D-Sub cables, the cable length should be 10 m (32'10") or shorter.)
* Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” keys or the “Fn” + “F10” keys simultaneously. This will differ depending on the model of the computer. Refer to the user manual provided with your computer.)
**What do I do if image output from DVI-D of the computer does not appear?**
* Is [EDID SELECT] in [DVI-D IN] set to [EDID3] or [EDID2:PC]?
* It may improve by updating the graphic accelerator driver of the computer to the latest version.
* It may improve by performing the [EDID SELECT] setting in [DVI-D IN], and then rebooting the computer.
**How can I fix a jumbled or missing HDMI video signal?**
* Ensure the HDMI cable is securely connected.
* Power cycle the projector and the external device.
* Verify the input signal is compatible with the projector.
**How do I adjust the lens shift?**
* Perform "LENS CALIBRATION".
**What should I do if I can't control the projector with Art-Net?**
* Verify the connections between the twisted-pair cable transmitter, external device, and projector are correct.
* Check that the "[Art-Net SETUP]" setting is not "[OFF]".
* Ensure the "[NET]", "[SUB NET]", "[UNIVERSE]", and "[START ADDRESS]" are configured correctly.
**Why is the DIGITAL LINK input image not displayed?**
* Confirm cable compatibility with the projector's usage conditions.
* Verify the connections between the twisted-pair cable transmitter, external device, and projector are correct.
* Check that the "[DIGITAL LINK MODE]" setting is either "[AUTO]" or "[DIGITAL LINK]", and not "[ETHERNET]".
**What should I do if the problems persist after checking the troubleshooting steps?**
Consult your dealer.
**How do I check the "[SELF TEST]" indications?**
The "[SELF TEST]" can be checked by navigating to the "[PROJECTOR SETUP]" menu, then "[STATUS]", and finally "[SELF TEST]".
**What does the alphanumeric symbol displayed during a "[SELF TEST]" indicate?**
The alphanumeric symbol represents an error or warning. Refer to the "Action number" corresponding to the displayed symbol and follow the "Measure for error and warning". The input supply voltage is displayed as a numeric value.
**What are the details of the error/warning displays and their corresponding action numbers?**
| Error/warning display | Details | Action number |
|---|---|---|
| U11 | Intake temperature warning | 1 |
| U12 | Optical module temperature warning | 1 |
| U13 | Exhaust air temperature warning | 1 |
| U14 | Low temperature warning | 2 |
| U16 | Light source 1 temperature warning | 1 |
| U17 | Light source 2 temperature warning | 1 |
| U21 | Intake temperature error | 1 |
| U22 | Optical module temperature error | 1 |
| U23 | Exhaust air temperature error | 1 |
| U24 | Low temperature error | 2 |
| U25 | Light source 1 temperature error | 1 |
| U26 | Light source 2 temperature error | 1 |
| U81 | Low AC voltage warning (below 90 V) | 3 |
| H01 | Battery replacement for the internal clock | 4 |
| H11 | Intake air temperature sensor error | 5 |
| H12 | Optical module temperature sensor error | 5 |
| H13 | Exhaust air temperature sensor error | 5 |
| H14 | Light source 1 temperature sensor error | 5 |
| H15 | Light source 2 temperature sensor error | 5 |
| F00 | Liquid cooling pump 1 warning | 5 |
| F01 | Liquid cooling pump 2 warning | 5 |
| F15 | Luminance sensor error | 5 |
| F16 | Angle sensor error | 5 |
| F18 | Air pressure sensor error | 5 |
| F50 | Radiator fan 3 warning | 5 |
| F51 | Phosphor wheel 1 fan warning | 5 |
| F52 | Phosphor wheel 2 fan warning | 5 |
| F53 | Power supply fan warning | 5 |
| F54 | LD driver fan warning | 5 |
| F55 | Exhaust fan 3 warning | 5 |
| F56 | DMD fan warning | 5 |
| F57 | Exhaust fan 1 warning | 5 |
| F58 | Exhaust fan 2 warning | 5 |
| F59 | Radiator fan 2 warning | 5 |
| F61 | Light source 1 driver communication error | 5 |
| F62 | Light source 2 driver communication error | 5 |
| F70 | Radiator fan 1 warning | 5 |
| F85 | Color wheel error (FM) | 5 |
| F86 | Color wheel error (FPGA) | 5 |
| F96 | Lens mounter error | 5 |
| FA8 | Light source 1 error | 5 |
| FC8 | Light source 2 error | 5 |
| FE1 | Radiator fan 3 error | 5 |
| FE2 | Phosphor wheel 1 fan error | 5 |
| FE3 | Phosphor wheel 2 fan error | 5 |
| FE4 | Power supply fan error | 5 |
| FE5 | LD driver fan error | 5 |
| FE6 | Exhaust fan 3 error | 5 |
| FE7 | DMD fan error | 5 |
| FE8 | Exhaust fan 1 error | 5 |
| FE9 | Exhaust fan 2 error | 5 |
| FF0 | Radiator fan 2 error | 5 |
| FF1 | Radiator fan 1 error | 5 |
| FH0 | Phosphor wheel 1 error | 5 |
| FH1 | | 5 |
| FH2 | Phosphor wheel 2 error | 5 |
| FH3 | | 5 |
| FJ0 | Liquid cooling pump 1 error | 5 |
| FJ1 | Liquid cooling pump 2 error | 5 |
| FL1 | Light source 1 unit error | 6 |
| FL2 | Light source 2 unit error | 6 |
**Are the self-diagnosis display and malfunction details always accurate?**
The self-diagnosis display and malfunction details may vary.
**What should I do for errors or warnings not listed in the table?**
Consult your dealer.
**What are the measures for errors and warnings based on action numbers?**
| Action number | Measure |
|---|---|
| 1 | The operating environment temperature is too high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature. |
| 2 | The operating environment temperature is too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature. |
| 3 | The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector. |
| 4 | Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer. |
| 5 | If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer. |
| 6 | The light source has failed to turn on. If the light source does not light up after turning the power off and on, consult your dealer. |
**Where can I find details about the projector's operating environment temperature?**
Refer to "Operating environment temperature".
**What PJLink protocol does the projector support?**
The projector's network function supports the PJLink class 1, allowing projector setting and status query operations from a computer.
**What control commands can be used with the PJLink protocol?**
| Command | Control details | Parameter/response string | Remark |
|---|---|---|---|
| POWR | Power supply control | 0 Standby<br>1 Power on | |
| POWR? | Power supply status query | 0 Standby<br>1 Power on<br>2 Preparing for switching off the projector<br>3 Warm-up | |
| INPT | Input selection | 11 RGB1<br>12 RGB2<br>31 DVI-D<br>32 HDMI<br>33 DIGITAL LINK<br>34 SDI (Only for PT-RZ970) | |
| INPT? | Input selection query | | |
| AVMT | Shutter control | 30 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open)<br>31 Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) | |
| AVMT? | Shutter status query | | |
| ERST? | Error status query | xxxxxx<br>1st byte Indicates fan errors, and returns 0 - 2.<br> f 0 = No error is detected<br> f 1 = Warning <br> f 2 = Error<br>2nd byte Indicates light source errors, and returns 0 - 2.<br>3rd byte Indicates temperature errors, and returns 0 - 2.<br>4th byte Returns 0.<br>5th byte Indicates filter errors, and returns 0 - 2.<br>6th byte Indicates other errors, and returns 0 - 2. | |
| LAMP? | Light source status query | xxxxxxxxxxxx<br>1st number (1 - 5 digits): Light source 1 runtime<br>2nd number: 0 = Light source 1 off, 1 = Light source 1 on<br>3rd number (1 - 5 digits): Light source 2 runtime<br>4th number: 0 = Light source 2 off, 1 = Light source 2 on | |
| INST? | Input selection list query | 11 12 31 32 33 34 Only for PT-RZ970<br>11 12 31 32 33 Only for PT-RW930, PT-RX110 | |
| NAME? | Projector name query | xxxxx Returns the name set in [PROJECTOR NAME] of [NETWORK SETUP]. | |
| INF1? | Manufacturer name query | Panasonic | Returns manufacturer name. |
| INF2? | Model name query | RZ970<br>RW930<br>RX110 | Returns model name. |
| INF0? | Other information queries | xxxxx | Returns version number. |
| CLSS? | Class information query | 1 | Returns class for PJLink. |
**What password is used for PJLink security authentication?**
The PJLink password is the same as the password set for web control. If security authentication is not used, do not set a password for web control.
**Where can I find more information about PJLink specifications?**
Visit the website of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/.
**What is the Art-Net function?**
The projector's network function supports the Art-Net function, enabling control of the projector settings with a DMX controller and application software using the Art-Net protocol.
**What are the channel definitions for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function?**
The following table lists the channel definitions. Channel settings can be switched using the "[NETWORK]" menu → "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]".
| Channel | Control details |
|---|---|
| [USER] | |
| CHANNEL1 | LIGHT OUTPUT<br>LIGHT OUTPUT<br>SHUTTER |
| CHANNEL2 | INPUT SELECT<br>INPUT SELECT<br>INPUT SELECT |
| CHANNEL3 | LENS POSITION<br>LENS POSITION<br>LENS FUNCTION SELECT |
| CHANNEL4 | LENS H SHIFT<br>LENS H SHIFT<br>LENS CONTROL |
| CHANNEL5 | LENS V SHIFT<br>LENS V SHIFT<br>POWER |
| CHANNEL6 | LENS FOCUS<br>LENS FOCUS<br>LIGHT OUTPUT |
| CHANNEL7 | LENS ZOOM<br>LENS ZOOM<br>ENABLE/DISABLE |
| CHANNEL8 | POWER<br>POWER<br>FADE-IN |
| CHANNEL9 | GEOMETRY<br>GEOMETRY<br>FADE-OUT |
| CHANNEL10 | CUSTOM MASKING*¹<br>CUSTOM MASKING*¹<br>CUSTOM MASKING*¹ |
| CHANNEL11 | ENABLE/DISABLE<br>ENABLE/DISABLE<br>GEOMETRY |
| CHANNEL12 | NONE<br>NONE<br>NONE |
*¹ For PT-RZ970. The setting for PT-RW930 or PT-RX110 is “NONE”.
**What are the control details for "LIGHT OUTPUT"?**
This can be set in 256 steps between 100 % and 0 %.
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| 0… … | 0 % | 255 |
| 100 % | 0 | 0 |
**What are the control details for "INPUT SELECT" when "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]" is set to ""?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | 0-7 |
| RGB1 | | 8-15 |
| RGB2 | | 16-23 |
| No operation | | 24-31 |
| DVI-D | | 32-39 |
| HDMI | | 40-47 |
| DIGITAL LINK | | 48-55 |
| SDI (Only for PT-RZ970) | | 56-63 |
| No operation | | 64-127 |
| P IN P execution, USER1 | | 128-135 |
| P IN P execution, USER2 | | 136-143 |
| P IN P execution, USER3 | | 144-151 |
| No operation | | 152-255 |
**What are the control details for "INPUT SELECT" when "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]" is set to "" or "[USER]"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | 0-7 |
| RGB1 | | 8-15 |
| RGB2 | | 16-23 |
| DVI-D | | 24-31 |
| HDMI | | 32-39 |
| DIGITAL LINK | | 40-47 |
| SDI (Only for PT-RZ970) | | 48-55 |
| No operation | | 56-119 |
| P IN P OFF | | 120-127 |
| P IN P execution, USER1 | | 128-135 |
| P IN P execution, USER2 | | 136-143 |
| P IN P execution, USER3 | | 144-151 |
| No operation | | 152-255 |
**What are the control details for "LENS POSITION"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | 0-31 |
| Move to the home position*¹ | | 32-63 |
| Move to the ET-DLE030 lens standard position*² | | |
| No operation | | 64-255 |
*¹ Operation when "[NORMAL]" is selected in "[HOME POSITION]" in the "[HOME POSITION]" screen.
*² Operation when "[DLE030]" is selected in "[HOME POSITION]" in the "[HOME POSITION]" screen.
**What are the control details for "LENS H SHIFT", "LENS V SHIFT", "LENS FOCUS", and "LENS ZOOM"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| Lens adjustment (-) High speed | | 0-31 |
| (-) Low speed | | 32-63 |
| (-) Fine adjustment | | 64-95 |
| Operation stop | | 96-159 |
| Lens adjustment (+) Fine adjustment | | 160-191 |
| (+) Low speed | | 192-223 |
| (+) High speed | | 224-255 |
| | 128 | |
| | 100 | |
**What are the control details for "LENS FUNCTION SELECT" when "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]" is set to ""?**
Operate together with "LENS CONTROL".
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | No operation | 0-15 |
| LENS H SHIFT | | 16-31 |
| LENS V SHIFT | | 32-47 |
| LENS FOCUS | | 48-63 |
| LENS ZOOM | | 64-79 |
| Move to the home position*¹ | | 80-95 |
| Move to the ET-DLE030 lens standard position*² | | |
| No operation | | 96-255 |
*¹ Operation when "[NORMAL]" is selected in "[HOME POSITION]" in the "[HOME POSITION]" screen.
*² Operation when "[DLE030]" is selected in "[HOME POSITION]" in the "[HOME POSITION]" screen.
**What are the control details for "LENS CONTROL" when "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]" is set to ""?**
Operate together with "LENS FUNCTION SELECT".
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| Lens adjustment (-) High speed | | 0-31 |
| (-) Low speed | | 32-63 |
| (-) Fine adjustment | | 64-95 |
| Operation stop | | 96-127 |
| Lens adjustment (+) Fine adjustment | | 128-159 |
| (+) Low speed | | 160-191 |
| (+) High speed | | 192-223 |
| Execute command action | | 224-255 |
| | 100 | |
**What are the control details for "POWER"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| Standby | | 0-63 |
| No operation | | 64-191 |
| Power on | | 192-255 |
| | 128 | |
**What are the control details for "SHUTTER"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| SHUTTER: Open | | 0-63 |
| No operation | | 64-191 |
| SHUTTER: Closed | | 192-255 |
| | 128 | |
**What are the control details for "FADE-IN" and "FADE-OUT" when "[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]" is set to "" or "[USER]"?**
Operate together with "SHUTTER".
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| OFF | | 0-15 |
| 0.5s | | 16-31 |
| 1.0s | | 32-47 |
| 1.5s | | 48-63 |
| 2.0s | | 64-79 |
| 2.5s | | 80-95 |
| 3.0s | | 96-111 |
| 3.5s | | 112-127 |
| 4.0s | | 128-143 |
| 5.0s | | 144-159 |
| 7.0s | | 160-175 |
| 10.0s | | 176-191 |
| No operation | | 192-255 |
| | 255 | |
**What are the control details for "GEOMETRY"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| OFF | | 0-15 |
| KEYSTONE | | 16-31 |
| CURVED CORRECTION | | 32-47 |
| PC-1*¹ | | 48-63 |
| PC-2*¹ | | 64-79 |
| PC-3*¹ | | 80-95 |
| CORNER CORRECTION | | 96-111 |
| No operation | | 112-255 |
| | 255 | |
*¹ Only for PT-RZ970.
**What are the control details for "CUSTOM MASKING"?**
Only for PT-RZ970. To use PC-1, PC-2, or PC-3, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required.
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| OFF | | 0-31 |
| PC-1 | | 32-63 |
| PC-2 | | 64-95 |
| PC-3 | | 96-127 |
| No operation | | 128-255 |
| | 255 | |
**What are the control details for "FREEZE"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| No operation | | 0-31 |
| OFF | | 32-95 |
| No operation | | 96-159 |
| ON | | 160-223 |
| No operation | | 224-255 |
| | 128 | |
**What are the control details for "COLOR" and "TINT"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| No operation | | 0-31 |
| Factory default setting | | 32-63 |
| -31 | | 64-65 |
| … … | 0 | 128-129 |
| … … | +31 | 190-191 |
| No operation | | 192-255 |
| | 0 | |
**What are the control details for "RASTER PATTERN"?**
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| No operation | | 0-15 |
| OFF | | 16-31 |
| WHITE | | 32-47 |
| YELLOW | | 48-63 |
| CYAN | | 64-79 |
| GREEN | | 80-95 |
| MAGENTA | | 96-111 |
| RED | | 112-127 |
| BLUE | | 128-143 |
| BLACK | | 144-159 |
| USER LOGO | | 160-175 |
| No operation | | 176-255 |
| | 0 | |
**What are the control details for "ENABLE/DISABLE"?**
Operation for all channels is not accepted when set to “Disable”.
| Performance | Parameter | Default value |
|---|---|---|
| Disable | | 0-127 |
| Enable | | 128-255 |
| | 0 | |
**What happens if the projector is operated using the remote control or control panel while using the Art-Net function?**
The setting of the DMX controller or computer application may differ from the projector status. To reflect the controls of all channels to the projector, set "ENABLE/DISABLE" of channel 11 to "Disable" and then back to "Enable".
**How can I create/register the USER LOGO image?**
Use the "Logo Transfer Software" included in the supplied CD-ROM.
**What are the steps for connecting control commands via LAN when the web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)?**
1. Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a connection. You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
* IP address: Obtain from the "[NETWORK]" menu → "[NETWORK STATUS]".
* Port number: Obtain from the "[NETWORK]" menu → "[NETWORK CONTROL]" → "[COMMAND PORT]".
2. Check the response from the projector.
| Data section | Data length | Mode | Blank | Random number section | Termination symbol |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| “NTCONTROL” (ASCII string) | 9 bytes | ‘ ’ 0x20 | ‘1’ 0x31 | “zzzzzzzz” (ASCII code hex number) | (CR) 0x0d |
| | | 1 byte | 1 byte | 8 bytes | 1 byte |
* Mode: 1 = Protect mode
* Example: Response during protect mode (random number section is undefined value) “NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)
3. Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using the MD5 algorithm.
* “xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
* xxxxxx: Administrator rights user name for the web control (default user name is “admin1”).
* yyyyy: Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “panasonic”).
* zzzzzzzz: 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2).
##### I I I I
**What is the command transmission method?**
Transmit using the following command formats:
* **Transmitted Data:**
* Header
* Data section
* Termination symbol
* **Example:** Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from default user name, password, and acquired random number) “dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR)
**What is the command example for the received data from the projector?**
* **Received data:**
* Header
* Data Section
* Termination symbol
* **Example:** The projector is powered on “00001” (CR)
**What is the error response for an undefined control command?**
“ERR1” Undefined control command (CR)
**What is the error response for being out of the parameter range?**
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
**What is the error response for a busy state or a no-acceptable period?**
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
**What is the error response for a timeout or a no-acceptable period?**
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
**What is the error response for the wrong data length?**
“ERR5” Wrong data length
**What is the error response for a password mismatch?**
“ERRA” Password mismatch
**How do you connect when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
1. Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a connection to the projector. You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
* IP address: Obtain from the \[NETWORK] menu → \[NETWORK STATUS].
* Port number: Obtain from the \[NETWORK] menu → \[NETWORK CONTROL] → \[COMMAND PORT].
2. Check the response from the projector.
* Data section: Blank
* Mode: Termination symbol
**What is the command example for connecting in Non-protect mode?**
* “NTCONTROL” (ASCII string)
* ‘ ’ 0x20
* ‘0’ 0x30
* (CR) 0x0d
* Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode
* Example: Response during non-protect mode “NTCONTROL 0” (CR)
**What is the command transmission method when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
Transmit using the following command formats:
* **Transmitted Data**
* Header
* Data section
* Termination symbol
* **Example:** Transmission of power supply status acquisition command “00QPW” (CR)
**What is an example command when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
* **Received Data**
* Header
* Data section
* Termination symbol
* **Example:** The power of the projector is in standby status “00000” (CR)
**What is the error response for an undefined control command when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERR1” Undefined control command (CR)
**What is the error response for being out of the parameter range when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
**What is the error response for a busy state or a no-acceptable period when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
**What is the error response for a timeout or a no-acceptable period when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
**What is the error response for the wrong data length when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERR5” Wrong data length
**What is the error response for a password mismatch when the web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)?**
“ERRA” Password mismatch
**What are the \<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/\<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals?**
The \<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/\<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminals of the projector conform with RS-232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer. A combined screen with a balanced contrast can be displayed by linking multiple projectors using the \<SERIAL/ MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal and the \<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal, and sharing the brightness level of the video signal input to each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors. It is also possible to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors.
**How do you connect for RS-232C communication with a single projector?**
* Connect a D-Sub 9p (male) communication cable (straight) from the computer to the D-Sub 9p (female) on the projector.
**How do you connect for RS-232C communication with multiple projectors?**
* Connect a D-Sub 9p (male) communication cable (straight) from the computer to the D-Sub 9p (female) on projector 1.
* Connect a D-Sub 9p (male) communication cable (straight) from the D-Sub 9p (male) on projector 1 to the D-Sub 9p (female) on projector 2.
**How do you connect for RS-232C communication when connecting using a DIGITAL LINK compatible device?**
* Connect a D-Sub 9p (male) communication cable (straight) from the computer to the D-Sub 9p (female) on the DIGITAL LINK compatible device.
* Connect a LAN cable (straight) from the DIGITAL LINK compatible device to the projector.
**What are some notes about connecting for RS-232C communication?**
* The destination of \[RS-232C] must be set according to the connection method.
* To control the projector with standby mode when connecting utilizing the DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the \[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → \[STANDBY MODE] to \[NORMAL]. When \[STANDBY MODE] is set to \[ECO], the projector cannot be controlled during standby.
**What are the pin assignments and signal names for the D-Sub 9-pin (female)?**
| Pin No. | Signal name | Details |
| :------- | :-------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1 | ― NC | |
| 2 | TXD | Transmitted data |
| 3 | RXD | Received data |
| 4 | MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC | For contrast synchronization function/for shutter synchronization function |
| 5 | GND | Earth |
| 6 | ― NC | |
| 7 | CTS | Connected internally |
| 8 | RTS | |
| 9 | ― NC | |
**What are the pin assignments and signal names for the D-Sub 9-pin (male)?**
| Pin No. | Signal name | Details |
| :------- | :-------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1 | ― NC | |
| 2 | RXD | Received data |
| 3 | TXD | Transmitted data |
| 4 | MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC | For contrast synchronization function/for shutter synchronization function |
| 5 | GND | Earth |
| 6 | ― NC | |
| 7 | RTS | Connected internally |
| 8 | CTS | |
| 9 | ― NC | |
**What are the RS-232C communication conditions (factory default)?**
* **Signal level:** RS-232C-compliant
* **Sync. method:** Asynchronous
* **Baud rate:** 9 600 bps
* **Parity:** None
* **Character length:** 8 bits
* **Stop bit:** 1 bit
* **X parameter:** None
* **S parameter:** None
**What is the basic format for RS-232C communication?**
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
| Start (1 byte) | 2 ID characters (2 bytes) | Semi-colon (1 byte) | Colon (1 byte) | 3 command characters (3 bytes) | Parameter (undefined length) | End (1 byte) |
| :-------------------------------------------------------- | :------------------------- | :------------------- | :--------------- | :------------------------------- | :----------------------------- | :----------------------------------------------------- |
| STX | IAl □ | ; | : | Cl I C2 I C3 | \[ | ] |
| ID designate<br>ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z | | | | | | ETX |
| \# -~ -.... ~<br>\# -<br>\# -~ -.... ~<br>\# - | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
**What is the basic format (has subcommands) for RS-232C communication?**
| Parameter (6 bytes)\*1 | Operation (1 byte)\*1 | Subcommand (5 bytes) |
| :-------------------------------------------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | :------------------------------- |
| Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5 bytes) | “=” (Set the value specified using parameter) | Same as the basic format |
| S l I 82 I 83 I 84 I 85 I \[I] I Pl I P2 I P3 I P4 I P5 I P6 I | \*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary. | |
| T | | |
**What are some things to pay attention to when using RS-232C communication?**
* If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
* When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
**What are some notes about RS-232C communication?**
* If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
* If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
* ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
* If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases:
* It matches the projector ID
* ID is designated as ALL and \[RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to \[ON]
* ID is designated as GROUP and \[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to \[ON]
* STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
**How do you control multiple projectors when they are all controlled together using RS-232C?**
When controlling multiple projectors together using RS-232C, perform the following settings:
1. Set a different ID for each projector.
2. Set \[RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to \[ON] in only one projector.
3. Set \[RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to \[OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
**How do you control multiple projectors when they are all controlled by group unit using RS-232C?**
When controlling multiple projectors by group unit using RS-232C, perform the following settings:
1. Set a different ID for each projector.
2. Set \[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to \[ON] in only one projector.
3. Set \[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to \[OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
**What are some notes about controlling multiple projectors?**
* Response is not made correctly if \[RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to \[ON] in two or more projectors.
* When setting multiple groups, set \[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to \[ON] in only one projector in each group. Response is not made correctly if \[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to \[ON] in two or more projectors of the same group.
* When using the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, control by RS-232C is not possible since multiple projectors are daisy chain connected in a loop.
**What is the cable specification when connected to a computer?**
| Projector (\<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal) | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 |
| :-------------------------------------------------------- | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: |
| Computer (DTE specifications) | NC | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | NC | 7 | 8 | NC |
**What is the cable specification when multiple projectors are connected?**
| Projector 1 (\<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal) | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 |
| :--------------------------------------------------------- | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: | :-: |
| Projector 2 (\<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN> terminal) | NC | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | NC | 7 | 8 | NC |
**What are some notes about the cable specifications?**
* A cable with pin (4) connected to each other such as full wired straight cable is required as the cable when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function. Also, set the \[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → \[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function.
**What are the projector control commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer?**
| Command | Details | Parameter/response string | Remark (parameter) |
| :------- | :----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | :------------------------- | :------------------ |
| PON | Power on | ― | To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command. |
| POF | Power standby | ― | |
| QPW | Power query | 000<br>001 | STANDBY |
| IIS | Switching the input signal | RG1 RGB1<br>RG2 RGB2<br>DVI DVI-D<br>HD1 HDMI<br>DL1 DIGITAL LINK<br>SD1 SDI (Only for PT-RZ970) | |
| OSH | Shutter control | 0 OPEN<br>1 CLOSE | |
| QSH | Shutter status query | | |
| VSE | Aspect ratio switch | 0 DEFAULT/VID AUTO/AUTO<br>1 4:3<br>2 16:9<br>5 THROUGH<br>6 HV FIT<br>9 H FIT<br>10 V FIT | |
| QSE | Aspect ratio settings query | | |
| OPP | P IN P execution | 0 OFF<br>1 USER1<br>2 USER2<br>3 USER3 | |
| QPP | P IN P setting query | | |
| OCS | Sub memory switch | 01 - 96 Sub memory number | |
| QSB | Sub memory status query | | |
**What are the projector control commands (with subcommand) that can be used to control the projector using a computer?**
| Command | Sub command | Details | Remark |
| :------- | :---------- | :-------------------------------------- | :------------------------- |
| VXX | RYCI1 | RGB1 input setting | +00000 = RGB/YPBPR, +00001 = Y/C, +00002 = VIDEO |
| | | | |
**What are the lens control commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer?**
| Command | Sub command | Details | Remark |
| :------- | :---------- | :--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | :----- |
| VXX | LNSI2 | Lens H shift<br>+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1-, +00100 = Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2-, +00200 = Coarse adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment- | |
| VXX | LNSI3 | Lens V shift | |
| VXX | LNSI4 | Lens focus | |
| VXX | LNSI5 | Lens zoom | |
**What is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal?**
It is possible to control the projector remotely (by contact control) from a control board located away from the projector where remote control signals cannot reach. Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control board.
**What are the details of remote control/contact control?**
* Remote control = Standby
* Contact control = Lit
* Light Source = RGB1 DIGITAL LINK
* Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc. = Remote control board in another location
**What are the pin assignments and signal names for the D-Sub 9-pin for remote control/contact control?**
| Pin No. | Signal name | Open (H) | Short (L) |
| :------- | :----------------- | :------- | :--------- |
| 1 | GND | ― | GND |
| 2 | POWER | OFF | ON |
| 3 | RGB1 | Other | RGB1 |
| 4 | RGB2 | Other | RGB2 |
| 5 | DIGITAL LINK | Other | DIGITAL LINK |
| 6 | HDMI | Other | HDMI |
| 7 | DVI-D | Other | DVI-D |
| 8 | SHUTTER | OFF | ON |
| 9 | RST/SET | Controlled by remote control | Controlled by external contact |
**What are some things to pay attention to when using remote control/contact control?**
* When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
* When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
* Power on **\<b>** button, power standby **\<v>** button, **\<SHUTTER>** button
* When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
* Power on **\<b>** button, power standby **\<v>** button, **\<RGB1>** button, **\<RGB2>** button, **\<RGB1/2>** button, **\<DVI-D>** button, **\<HDMI>** button, **\<DIGITAL LINK>** button, **\<SDI>** button, **\<SHUTTER>** button (SDI input is supported only for PT-RZ970.)
**What are some notes about using remote control/contact control?**
* To change the settings of pins (2) to (8), set the \[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → \[REMOTE2 MODE] to \[USER].
**What is the two-window display combination list?**
* l: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible
* a: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible through the same frequency signal
* ―: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is not possible
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB1?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | ― | ― | ― | ― |
| Moving image\*1 | ― | ― | ― | ― |
| Y/C input | ― | ― | ― | ― |
| VIDEO input | ― | ― | ― | ― |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB2?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | l | l | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a | a | a |
| Y/C input | l | a | a | a |
| VIDEO input | l | a | a | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is DVI-D?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | l | l | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a | a | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is HDMI?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | l | l | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a | a | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is SDI\*4?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | l | a | a | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is DIGITAL LINK?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*1 | Y/C input | VIDEO input |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :-------- | :---------- |
| RGB | ― | ― | ― | ― |
| Moving image\*1 | ― | ― | ― | ― |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB1 and the main window is RGB2?**
| Main window | RGB input | Moving image\*2 | RGB\*2 input | Moving image\*3 |
| :----------------- | :-------- | :------------- | :----------- | :------------- |
| RGB | l | l | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a | l | a |
| Y/C input | l | a | l | a |
| VIDEO input | l | a | l | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB2 and the main window is DVI-D?**
| Main window | RGB\*2 input | Moving image\*3 |
| :---------------- | :----------- | :------------- |
| RGB | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB2 and the main window is HDMI?**
| Main window | RGB\*2 input | Moving image\*3 |
| :---------------- | :----------- | :------------- |
| RGB | l | l |
| Moving image\*1 | l | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB2 and the main window is SDI\*4?**
| Main window | RGB\*2 input | Moving image\*3 |
| :---------------- | :----------- | :------------- |
| RGB | l | a |
**What is the two-window display combination list when the sub window is RGB2 and the main window is DIGITAL LINK?**
| Main window | RGB\*2 input | Moving image\*3 |
| :---------------- | :----------- | :------------- |
| RGB | ― | ― |
| Moving image\*1 | ― | ― |
**What do the \* numbers mean on the two-window display combination list?**
* \*1 480/60i, 480/60p, 576/50i, 576/50p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, 1080/60p
* \*2 640 x 400 - 1 920 x 1 200 Non-interlaced signal, dot clock frequency: 25 MHz - 162 MHz
* \*3 Only supports 480/60p, 576/50p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, and 1080/60p
* \*4 Only for PT-RZ970
**What are some notes about the two-window display combination list?**
* The image of the sub window is not displayed when the P IN P function is used with a signal of different frequency.
**What should I do if I need to initialize the password for the control device?**
Consult your distributor.
**What functions are extended if the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is applied (Only for PT-RZ970)?**
| Function | Standard status | When the Upgrade Kit is applied |
| :------------------------------ | :---------------------------------------- | :----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Adjustment range of \[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] | Maximum of ±40°\*1 | Maximum of ±45°\*1 |
| Adjustment range of \[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] | Maximum of ±15°\*1 | Maximum of ±40°\*1 |
| Adjustment range of \[CURVED CORRECTION] | Vertical arc, Maximum ±50\*1<br>Horizontal arc, Maximum ±50\*1 | Vertical arc, Maximum ±100\*1<br>Horizontal arc, Maximum ±100\*1 |
| \[CUSTOM MASKING] | Cannot be used. | The image is masked in optional form. |
| \[PC CORRECTION] for \[UNIFORMITY] | Cannot be used. | Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen. |
**What does the \*1 mean in the table about the optional Upgrade Kit?**
The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range” for the possible projection range.
**What do the symbols that indicate formats in the List of compatible signals mean?**
* V: VIDEO, Y/C
* R: RGB (analog)
* Y: YCBCR/YPBPR (analog)
* D: DVI-D
* H: HDMI
**What does the input corresponding to each item in the plug and play column mean in the List of compatible signals mean?**
* RGB2: RGB2 input
* DVI-D: DVI-D input
* HDMI/DL: HDMI input, DIGITAL LINK input
**What are the compatible signals for NTSC/NTSC4.43/ PAL-M/PAL60?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :----- | :--------------- |
| NTSC/NTSC4.43/ PAL-M/PAL60 | 720 x 480i | 15.7 | 59.9 | ― | V | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for PAL/PAL-N/SECAM?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :----- | :--------------- |
| PAL/PAL-N/SECAM | 720 x 576i | 15.6 | 50.0 | ― | V | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 480/60i?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :----- | :--------------- |
| 480/60i | 720 x 480i | 15.7 | 59.9 | 13.5 | R/Y | ― |
| 480/60i | 720 (1 440) x 480i\*2 | 15.7 | 59.9 | 27.0 | D/H | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 576/50i?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :----- | :--------------- |
| 576/50i | 720 x 576i | 15.6 | 50.0 | 13.5 | R/Y | ― |
| 576/50i | 720 (1 440) x 576i\*2 | 15.6 | 50.0 | 27.0 | D/H | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 480/60p?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :---------- | :--------------- |
| 480/60p | 720 x 480 | 31.5 | 59.9 | 27.0 | R/Y/D/H | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 576/50p?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :----------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :---------- | :--------------- |
| 576/50p | 720 x 576 | 31.3 | 50.0 | 27.0 | R/Y/D/H | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 720/60p?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :------------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :---------- | :--------------- |
| 720/60p | 1 280 x 720 | 45.0 | 60.0 | 74.3 | R/Y/D/H | ― |
**What are the compatible signals for 720/50p?**
| Signal name (SIGNAL FORMAT) | Resolution (Dots) | Scanning freq. <br>Horizontal (kHz) | Vertical (Hz) | Dot clock freq. (MHz) | Format | Plug and play\*1 |
| :-------------------------- | :------------------- | :------------------------------------ | :------------- | :------------------------- | :---------- | :--------------- |
| 720/50p | 1 280 x 720 | 3
**What signal has l in the plug and play column?**
A signal with l in the plug and play column is a signal described in the EDID (extended display identification data) of the projector.
**What if the signal does not have l in the plug and play column?**
The signal that does not have l in the plug and play column can also be input if it is described in the format column. The resolution may not be selected in the computer even if the projector is compatible for the signal that does not have l in the plug and play column.
**What does the "i" at the end of the resolution indicate?**
The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
**What happens when interlaced signals are connected?**
When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.
**Is DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal the same as HDMI input compatible signal?**
Yes, DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
**What is the note about the signal with a different resolution?**
A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots.
**What is the number of display dots for PT-RZ970, PT-RW930, and PT-RX110?**
* PT-RZ970: 1 920 x 1 200
* PT-RW930: 1 280 x 800
* PT-RX110: 1 024 x 768
**What does the asterisk 1 in the table of SDI Compatible Signals indicate?**
The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
**What are the specifications of the power supply for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970B, PT‑RZ970W, PT‑RZ970LB, PT‑RZ970LW, PT‑RZ970BD, PT‑RZ970WD, PT‑RZ970LBD, PT‑RZ970LWD, PT‑RZ970BA, PT‑RZ970WA, PT‑RZ970LBA, PT‑RZ970LWA, PT‑RW930B, PT‑RW930W, PT‑RW930LB, PT‑RW930LW, PT‑RW930BD, PT‑RW930WD, PT‑RW930LBD, PT‑RW930LWD, PT‑RW930BA, PT‑RW930WA, PT‑RW930LBA, PT‑RW930LWA, PT‑RX110B, PT‑RX110W, PT‑RX110LB, PT‑RX110LW, PT‑RX110BD, PT‑RX110WD, PT‑RX110LBD, PT‑RX110LWD, PT‑RX110BA, PT‑RX110WA, PT‑RX110LBA, PT‑RX110LWA?**
100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz
**What are the specifications of the power supply for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970BT, PT‑RW930BT, PT‑RX110BT?**
110 V - 240 V ~ (110 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz
**What is the power consumption for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970B, PT‑RZ970W, PT‑RZ970LB, PT‑RZ970LW, PT‑RZ970BD, PT‑RZ970WD, PT‑RZ970LBD, PT‑RZ970LWD, PT‑RZ970BA, PT‑RZ970WA, PT‑RZ970LBA, PT‑RZ970LWA, PT‑RW930B, PT‑RW930W, PT‑RW930LB, PT‑RW930LW, PT‑RW930BD, PT‑RW930WD, PT‑RW930LBD, PT‑RW930LWD, PT‑RW930BA, PT‑RW930WA, PT‑RW930LBA, PT‑RW930LWA, PT‑RX110B, PT‑RX110W, PT‑RX110LB, PT‑RX110LW, PT‑RX110BD, PT‑RX110WD, PT‑RX110LBD, PT‑RX110LWD, PT‑RX110BA, PT‑RX110WA, PT‑RX110LBA, PT‑RX110LWA?**
1 050 W (10.4 A - 5.0 A)
**What is the power consumption for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970BT, PT‑RW930BT, PT‑RX110BT?**
1 050 W (9.5 A - 5.0 A)
**What is the power consumption (during standby) when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970B, PT‑RZ970W, PT‑RZ970LB, PT‑RZ970LW, PT‑RZ970BD, PT‑RZ970WD, PT‑RZ970LBD, PT‑RZ970LWD, PT‑RZ970BA, PT‑RZ970WA, PT‑RZ970LBA, PT‑RZ970LWA, PT‑RW930B, PT‑RW930W, PT‑RW930LB, PT‑RW930LW, PT‑RW930BD, PT‑RW930WD, PT‑RW930LBD, PT‑RW930LWD, PT‑RW930BA, PT‑RW930WA, PT‑RW930LBA, PT‑RW930LWA, PT‑RX110B, PT‑RX110W, PT‑RX110LB, PT‑RX110LW, PT‑RX110BD, PT‑RX110WD, PT‑RX110LBD, PT‑RX110LWD, PT‑RX110BA, PT‑RX110WA, PT‑RX110LBA, PT‑RX110LWA?**
Approx. 0.3 W
**What is the power consumption (during standby) when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] for the following projector models: PT‑RZ970BT, PT‑RW930BT, PT‑RX110BT?**
Approx. 0.3 W
**What is the power consumption (during standby) when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]?**
Approx. 3 W
**What is the power consumption (during standby) when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is enabled?**
Approx. 85 W
**What is the DLP chip size for the PT-RZ970?**
17 mm (0.67") (aspect ratio 16:10)
**What is the DLP chip size for the PT-RW930?**
16.5 mm (0.65") (aspect ratio 16:10)
**What is the DLP chip size for the PT-RX110?**
17.8 mm (0.7") (aspect ratio 4:3)
**What is the display system?**
DLP chip x 1, DLP projection system
**What is the number of pixels for the PT-RZ970?**
2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
**What is the number of pixels for the PT-RW930?**
1 024 000 pixels (1 280 x 800 dots)
**What is the number of pixels for the PT-RX110?**
786 432 pixels (1 024 x 768 dots)
**What is the Electric Zoom for the PT-RZ970?**
1.7 to 2.4:1
**What is the Electric Zoom for the PT-RW930 and PT-RX110?**
1.8 to 2.5:1
**What is the Electric Focus?**
F = 1.7 to 1.9 f = 25.6 mm to 35.7 mm
**What is the light source?**
Laser light source, 2 sets
**What is the light output for the PT-RZ970 and PT-RW930 when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]?**
* 9 400 lm
* 10 000 lm (center)
**What is the light output for the PT-RX110 when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]?**
* 10 000 lm
* 10 400 lm (center)
**What is the contrast ratio when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to?**
10 000:1
**What is the color system?**
7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)
**What is the projected image size?**
1.27 m (50") to 15.24 m (600")
**What is the maximum projected image size when the lens ET-DLE055 is used?**
5.08 m (200")
**What is the maximum projected image size when the lens ET-DLE030 is used?**
2.54 m (100") to 8.89 m (350")
**What is the image aspect ratio for the PT-RZ970 and PT-RW930?**
16:10
**What is the image aspect ratio for the PT-RX110?**
4:3
**What is the projection method?**
[FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING]
**What is the power cord length?**
3.0 m (118-1/8")
**What is the outer case made of?**
Molded plastic
**What is the outer color of the black model?**
Black
**What is the outer color of the white model?**
White
**What is the width dimension?**
498 mm (19-19/32")
**What is the height dimension?**
200 mm (7-7/8") (with legs at shortest position)
**What is the depth dimension of the PT-RZ970, PT-RW930, and PT-RX110?**
581 mm (22-7/8") (including standard zoom lens)
**What is the depth dimension of the PT-RZ970L, PT-RW930L, and PT-RX110L?**
538 mm (21-3/16") (excluding the Lens Mount Cover and optional lens)
**What is the weight of the PT‑RZ970, PT‑RW930, and PT‑RX110?**
Approx. 23.2 kg (51.1 lbs.) (including standard zoom lens)
**What is the weight of the PT‑RZ970L, PT‑RW930L, and PT‑RX110L?**
Approx. 22.4 kg (49.4 lbs.) (excluding the Lens Mount Cover and optional lens)
**What is the noise level?**
41 dB
**What is the operating environment temperature?**
0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)
**What happens when using the projector at an altitude lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level, and the operating environment temperature becomes 30 °C (86 °F) or higher?**
The light output may be reduced to protect the projector.
**What happens when using the projector at an altitude between 2 700 m (8 858') and 4 200 m (13 780'), and the operating environment temperature becomes 25 °C (77 °F) or higher?**
The light output may be reduced to protect the projector.
**What is the operating environment humidity?**
10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
**What is the power supply of the remote control?**
DC 3 V (AAA/R03/LR03 battery x 2)
**What is the operating range of the remote control?**
Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
**What is the weight of the remote control?**
102 g (3.6 ozs.) (including batteries)
**What are the dimensions of the remote control?**
* Width: 48 mm (1-7/8")
* Height: 145 mm (5-23/32")
* Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")
**Are lenses for the PT-RZ970L series, PT-RW930L series, and PT-RX110L series sold separately?**
Yes. The lens for PT-RZ970L series, PT-RW930L series, and PT-RX110L series is sold separately.
**Does the value of light output vary depending on the lens?**
Yes, the value is for the supplied standard zoom lens and varies depending on the lens.
**What standards does the measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation for light output comply with?**
ISO/IEC 21118:2012 international standards
**How is the value of the light output at the center region of the projected image extracted?**
The value of the light output at the center region of the projected image is extracted based on the light output measurement method defined by the ISO/IEC 21118:2012 international standards.
**What is the average weight of the projector?**
The average weight is 23.2 kg (51.1 lbs) but varies for each product.
**What is the RGB signal of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
**What is the SYNC/HD of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible
**What is the VD of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible
**What is the YPBPR signal of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
**What is the Y/C signal of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
Y: 1.0 V [p-p], C: 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω
**What is the VIDEO signal of the <RGB 1 IN> terminal?**
BNC 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω
**What is the RGB signal of the <RGB 2 IN> terminal?**
0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
**What is the SYNC/HD of the <RGB 2 IN> terminal?**
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible
**What is the VD of the <RGB 2 IN> terminal?**
TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible
**What is the YPBPR signal of the <RGB 2 IN> terminal?**
Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
**Is the <DVI-D IN> terminal HDCP compatible?**
Yes, it is DVI 1.0 compliant and HDCP compatible.
**Is the <HDMI IN> terminal HDCP compatible?**
Yes, it is HDCP compatible, and Deep Color compatible.
**What is the SD-SDI signal of the <SDI IN> terminal?**
SMPTE ST 259 compliant
**What is the HD-SDI signal of the <SDI IN> terminal?**
SMPTE ST 292 compliant
**What is the 3G-SDI signal of the <SDI IN> terminal?**
SMPTE ST 424 compliant
**What is the <SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC OUT> terminal for?**
For computer control
**What is the <REMOTE 1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal for?**
For remote control (wired)/for projector connection control
**What is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal for?**
For contact control
**What is the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal for?**
For network and DIGITAL LINK connections (HDBaseTTM compliant), PJLink compatible, 100Base-TX, Art-Net compatible, HDCP compatible, Deep Color compatible
**Are the model numbers of accessories and optional accessories subject to change without prior notice?**
Yes.
**Where can you find details of the types of video signals that can be used with the projector?**
Refer to “List of compatible signals”.
**What are the video input, Y/C input specifications?**
* Horizontal: 15.73 kHz, Vertical: 59.94 Hz
* Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
**What are the RGB input specifications?**
* Resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200
* Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less
* PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
**What are the YCBCR/YPBPR input specifications?**
* Resolution: 480i/576i to 1 920 x 1 080
* Dot clock frequency: 148.5 MHz or less
* The HD/SYNC and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
**What are the DVI-D input specifications?**
* Moving image signal resolution: 480i/576i to 1 920 x 1 080
* Still image signal resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
* Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
**What are the HDMI input specifications?**
* Moving image signal resolution: 480i/576i to 1 920 x 1 080
* Still image signal resolution: 640 x 400 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
* Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
**What are the SDI input specifications?**
* SD-SDI signal
* HD-SDI signal
* 3G-SDI signal
**What is the Pixel-Repetition signal?**
Dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz
**What are the dimensions obtained when the standard zoom lens is attached?**
* 221 (8-11/16")
* 249 (9-13/16")
* 498 (19-19/32")
* 457 (18")
* 442 (17-13/32")
* 20.5 (1 3/16")
* 115.5 (4 -9/16")
* 200 (7 -7/8")
* 43 (1 -1 1/16")
* 538 (21-3/ 16")
**May the actual dimensions of the projector with the standard zoom lens attached differ depending on the product?**
Yes.
**What must you do when installing the projector to the ceiling?**
Be sure to use the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket specified by Panasonic.
**What are the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket model numbers?**
* ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
* ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
* ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)
* ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)
**How is the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) used?**
In combination with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
**What should you attach to the projector when installing the projector to the ceiling?**
The drop-prevention set that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket.
**Who should you ask to do the installation work, such as mounting the projector on the ceiling?**
A qualified technician.
**If you need the drop-prevention set (Service Model No.: TTRA0214), who should you consult?**
Your dealer.
**Does Panasonic take any responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the Ceiling Mount Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installing the Ceiling Mount Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired?**
No.
**Who must remove unused products promptly?**
A qualified technician.
**What tool should you use to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques?**
Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench.
**What tools should you not use to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques?**
Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
**Where can you find details about attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket?**
Read the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket.
**What is the torque for the M6 bolts on the bottom of the projector when using the Ceiling Mount Bracket Model Nos. ET-PKD120H, ET-PKD120S, ET-PKD130H, and ET-PKD130B?**
4 ± 0.5 N·m
**What are the symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean?**
That used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
**What should you do with old products and used batteries?**
Take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation for proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
**What will you help prevent by disposing of old products and used batteries correctly?**
Any potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
**Who should you contact for more information about collection and recycling?**
Your local municipality.
**Might the battery symbol be used in combination with a chemical symbol?**
Yes, this symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol.
**What does the battery symbol comply with when used in combination with a chemical symbol?**
The requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
**What is the telephone number for Panasonic System Communications Company of North America?**
(877) 803 - 8492
**What is the telephone number for Panasonic Canada Inc.?**
(905) 624 - 5010
**What is the website for Panasonic Corporation?**
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
**What is the copyright information for Panasonic Corporation?**
© Panasonic Corporation 2016CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD PANASONIC PT-RZ970 (01) PDF MANUAL